1 Minetest Lua Modding API Reference
2 ==================================
4 * More information at <http://www.minetest.net/>
5 * Developer Wiki: <http://dev.minetest.net/>
6 * (Unofficial) Minetest Modding Book by rubenwardy: <https://rubenwardy.com/minetest_modding_book/>
11 Content and functionality can be added to Minetest using Lua scripting
12 in run-time loaded mods.
14 A mod is a self-contained bunch of scripts, textures and other related
15 things, which is loaded by and interfaces with Minetest.
17 Mods are contained and ran solely on the server side. Definitions and media
18 files are automatically transferred to the client.
20 If you see a deficiency in the API, feel free to attempt to add the
21 functionality in the engine and API, and to document it here.
26 If you have any difficulty in understanding this, please read
27 [Programming in Lua](http://www.lua.org/pil/).
32 Mods are loaded during server startup from the mod load paths by running
33 the `init.lua` scripts in a shared environment.
38 * `RUN_IN_PLACE=1` (Windows release, local build)
39 * `$path_user`: `<build directory>`
40 * `$path_share`: `<build directory>`
41 * `RUN_IN_PLACE=0`: (Linux release)
43 * Linux: `/usr/share/minetest`
44 * Windows: `<install directory>/minetest-0.4.x`
46 * Linux: `$HOME/.minetest`
47 * Windows: `C:/users/<user>/AppData/minetest` (maybe)
55 Games are looked up from:
57 * `$path_share/games/<gameid>/`
58 * `$path_user/games/<gameid>/`
60 Where `<gameid>` is unique to each game.
62 The game directory can contain the following files:
64 * `game.conf`, with the following keys:
65 * `name`: Required, a human readable title to address the game, e.g. `name = Minetest`.
66 * `description`: Short description to be shown in the content tab
67 * `allowed_mapgens = <comma-separated mapgens>`
68 e.g. `allowed_mapgens = v5,v6,flat`
69 Mapgens not in this list are removed from the list of mapgens for the
71 If not specified, all mapgens are allowed.
72 * `disallowed_mapgens = <comma-separated mapgens>`
73 e.g. `disallowed_mapgens = v5,v6,flat`
74 These mapgens are removed from the list of mapgens for the game.
75 When both `allowed_mapgens` and `disallowed_mapgens` are
76 specified, `allowed_mapgens` is applied before
78 * `disallowed_mapgen_settings= <comma-separated mapgen settings>`
79 e.g. `disallowed_mapgen_settings = mgv5_spflags`
80 These settings are hidden for this game in the world creation
81 dialog and game start menu.
82 * `author`: The author of the game. It only appears when downloaded from
84 * `release`: Ignore this: Should only ever be set by ContentDB, as it is
85 an internal ID used to track versions.
87 Used to set default settings when running this game.
89 In the same format as the one in builtin.
90 This settingtypes.txt will be parsed by the menu and the settings will be
91 displayed in the "Games" category in the advanced settings tab.
92 * If the game contains a folder called `textures` the server will load it as a
93 texturepack, overriding mod textures.
94 Any server texturepack will override mod textures and the game texturepack.
99 Games can provide custom main menu images. They are put inside a `menu`
100 directory inside the game directory.
102 The images are named `$identifier.png`, where `$identifier` is one of
103 `overlay`, `background`, `footer`, `header`.
104 If you want to specify multiple images for one identifier, add additional
105 images named like `$identifier.$n.png`, with an ascending number $n starting
106 with 1, and a random image will be chosen from the provided ones.
117 Paths are relative to the directories listed in the [Paths] section above.
119 * `games/<gameid>/mods/`
121 * `worlds/<worldname>/worldmods/`
126 It is possible to include a game in a world; in this case, no mods or
127 games are loaded or checked from anywhere else.
129 This is useful for e.g. adventure worlds and happens if the `<worldname>/game/`
132 Mods should then be placed in `<worldname>/game/mods/`.
137 Mods can be put in a subdirectory, if the parent directory, which otherwise
138 should be a mod, contains a file named `modpack.conf`.
139 The file is a key-value store of modpack details.
141 * `name`: The modpack name. Allows Minetest to determine the modpack name even
142 if the folder is wrongly named.
143 * `description`: Description of mod to be shown in the Mods tab of the main
145 * `author`: The author of the modpack. It only appears when downloaded from
147 * `release`: Ignore this: Should only ever be set by ContentDB, as it is an
148 internal ID used to track versions.
149 * `title`: A human-readable title to address the modpack.
151 Note: to support 0.4.x, please also create an empty modpack.txt file.
153 Mod directory structure
154 -----------------------
160 │ ├── settingtypes.txt
164 │ │ ├── modname_stuff.png
165 │ │ ├── modname_stuff_normal.png
166 │ │ ├── modname_something_else.png
167 │ │ ├── subfolder_foo
168 │ │ │ ├── modname_more_stuff.png
169 │ │ │ └── another_subfolder
170 │ │ └── bar_subfolder
179 The location of this directory can be fetched by using
180 `minetest.get_modpath(modname)`.
184 A `Settings` file that provides meta information about the mod.
186 * `name`: The mod name. Allows Minetest to determine the mod name even if the
187 folder is wrongly named.
188 * `description`: Description of mod to be shown in the Mods tab of the main
190 * `depends`: A comma separated list of dependencies. These are mods that must be
191 loaded before this mod.
192 * `optional_depends`: A comma separated list of optional dependencies.
193 Like a dependency, but no error if the mod doesn't exist.
194 * `author`: The author of the mod. It only appears when downloaded from
196 * `release`: Ignore this: Should only ever be set by ContentDB, as it is an
197 internal ID used to track versions.
198 * `title`: A human-readable title to address the mod.
200 Note: to support 0.4.x, please also provide depends.txt.
204 A screenshot shown in the mod manager within the main menu. It should
205 have an aspect ratio of 3:2 and a minimum size of 300×200 pixels.
209 **Deprecated:** you should use mod.conf instead.
211 This file is used if there are no dependencies in mod.conf.
213 List of mods that have to be loaded before loading this mod.
215 A single line contains a single modname.
217 Optional dependencies can be defined by appending a question mark
218 to a single modname. This means that if the specified mod
219 is missing, it does not prevent this mod from being loaded.
221 ### `description.txt`
223 **Deprecated:** you should use mod.conf instead.
225 This file is used if there is no description in mod.conf.
227 A file containing a description to be shown in the Mods tab of the main menu.
229 ### `settingtypes.txt`
231 The format is documented in `builtin/settingtypes.txt`.
232 It is parsed by the main menu settings dialogue to list mod-specific
233 settings in the "Mods" category.
237 The main Lua script. Running this script should register everything it
238 wants to register. Subsequent execution depends on minetest calling the
239 registered callbacks.
241 `minetest.settings` can be used to read custom or existing settings at load
242 time, if necessary. (See [`Settings`])
244 ### `textures`, `sounds`, `media`, `models`, `locale`
246 Media files (textures, sounds, whatever) that will be transferred to the
247 client and will be available for use by the mod and translation files for
248 the clients (see [Translations]).
250 It is suggested to use the folders for the purpous they are thought for,
251 eg. put textures into `textures`, translation files into `locale`,
252 models for entities or meshnodes into `models` et cetera.
254 These folders and subfolders can contain subfolders.
255 Subfolders with names starting with `_` or `.` are ignored.
256 If a subfolder contains a media file with the same name as a media file
257 in one of its parents, the parent's file is used.
259 Although it is discouraged, a mod can overwrite a media file of any mod that it
260 depends on by supplying a file with an equal name.
265 Registered names should generally be in this format:
269 `<whatever>` can have these characters:
273 This is to prevent conflicting names from corrupting maps and is
274 enforced by the mod loader.
276 Registered names can be overridden by prefixing the name with `:`. This can
277 be used for overriding the registrations of some other mod.
279 The `:` prefix can also be used for maintaining backwards compatibility.
283 In the mod `experimental`, there is the ideal item/node/entity name `tnt`.
284 So the name should be `experimental:tnt`.
286 Any mod can redefine `experimental:tnt` by using the name
290 when registering it. That mod is required to have `experimental` as a
299 Aliases of itemnames can be added by using
300 `minetest.register_alias(alias, original_name)` or
301 `minetest.register_alias_force(alias, original_name)`.
303 This adds an alias `alias` for the item called `original_name`.
304 From now on, you can use `alias` to refer to the item `original_name`.
306 The only difference between `minetest.register_alias` and
307 `minetest.register_alias_force` is that if an item named `alias` already exists,
308 `minetest.register_alias` will do nothing while
309 `minetest.register_alias_force` will unregister it.
311 This can be used for maintaining backwards compatibility.
313 This can also set quick access names for things, e.g. if
314 you have an item called `epiclylongmodname:stuff`, you could do
316 minetest.register_alias("stuff", "epiclylongmodname:stuff")
318 and be able to use `/giveme stuff`.
323 In a game, a certain number of these must be set to tell core mapgens which
324 of the game's nodes are to be used for core mapgen generation. For example:
326 minetest.register_alias("mapgen_stone", "default:stone")
328 ### Aliases for non-V6 mapgens
330 #### Essential aliases
333 * mapgen_water_source
334 * mapgen_river_water_source
336 `mapgen_river_water_source` is required for mapgens with sloping rivers where
337 it is necessary to have a river liquid node with a short `liquid_range` and
338 `liquid_renewable = false` to avoid flooding.
340 #### Optional aliases
344 Fallback lava node used if cave liquids are not defined in biome definitions.
345 Deprecated for non-V6 mapgens, define cave liquids in biome definitions instead.
349 Fallback node used if dungeon nodes are not defined in biome definitions.
350 Deprecated for non-V6 mapgens, define dungeon nodes in biome definitions instead.
352 ### Aliases needed for Mapgen V6
355 * mapgen_water_source
358 * mapgen_dirt_with_grass
361 * mapgen_desert_stone
363 * mapgen_dirt_with_snow
372 * mapgen_jungleleaves
375 * mapgen_pine_needles
378 * mapgen_stair_cobble
380 * mapgen_stair_desert_stone
382 ### Setting the node used in Mapgen Singlenode
384 By default the world is filled with air nodes. To set a different node use, for
387 minetest.register_alias("mapgen_singlenode", "default:stone")
395 Mods should generally prefix their textures with `modname_`, e.g. given
396 the mod name `foomod`, a texture could be called:
400 Textures are referred to by their complete name, or alternatively by
401 stripping out the file extension:
403 * e.g. `foomod_foothing.png`
404 * e.g. `foomod_foothing`
410 There are various texture modifiers that can be used
411 to let the client generate textures on-the-fly.
412 The modifiers are applied directly in sRGB colorspace,
413 i.e. without gamma-correction.
415 ### Texture overlaying
417 Textures can be overlaid by putting a `^` between them.
421 default_dirt.png^default_grass_side.png
423 `default_grass_side.png` is overlaid over `default_dirt.png`.
424 The texture with the lower resolution will be automatically upscaled to
425 the higher resolution texture.
429 Textures can be grouped together by enclosing them in `(` and `)`.
431 Example: `cobble.png^(thing1.png^thing2.png)`
433 A texture for `thing1.png^thing2.png` is created and the resulting
434 texture is overlaid on top of `cobble.png`.
438 Modifiers that accept texture names (e.g. `[combine`) accept escaping to allow
439 passing complex texture names as arguments. Escaping is done with backslash and
440 is required for `^` and `:`.
442 Example: `cobble.png^[lowpart:50:color.png\^[mask\:trans.png`
444 The lower 50 percent of `color.png^[mask:trans.png` are overlaid
445 on top of `cobble.png`.
447 ### Advanced texture modifiers
453 * `[crack:<t>:<n>:<p>`
454 * `[cracko:<t>:<n>:<p>`
458 * `<t>`: tile count (in each direction)
459 * `<n>`: animation frame count
460 * `<p>`: current animation frame
462 Draw a step of the crack animation on the texture.
463 `crack` draws it normally, while `cracko` lays it over, keeping transparent
468 default_cobble.png^[crack:10:1
470 #### `[combine:<w>x<h>:<x1>,<y1>=<file1>:<x2>,<y2>=<file2>:...`
476 * `<file>`: texture to combine
478 Creates a texture of size `<w>` times `<h>` and blits the listed files to their
479 specified coordinates.
483 [combine:16x32:0,0=default_cobble.png:0,16=default_wood.png
485 #### `[resize:<w>x<h>`
487 Resizes the texture to the given dimensions.
491 default_sandstone.png^[resize:16x16
495 Makes the base image transparent according to the given ratio.
497 `r` must be between 0 (transparent) and 255 (opaque).
501 default_sandstone.png^[opacity:127
503 #### `[invert:<mode>`
505 Inverts the given channels of the base image.
506 Mode may contain the characters "r", "g", "b", "a".
507 Only the channels that are mentioned in the mode string will be inverted.
511 default_apple.png^[invert:rgb
515 Brightens the texture.
519 tnt_tnt_side.png^[brighten
523 Makes the texture completely opaque.
527 default_leaves.png^[noalpha
529 #### `[makealpha:<r>,<g>,<b>`
531 Convert one color to transparency.
535 default_cobble.png^[makealpha:128,128,128
539 * `<t>`: transformation(s) to apply
541 Rotates and/or flips the image.
543 `<t>` can be a number (between 0 and 7) or a transform name.
544 Rotations are counter-clockwise.
547 1 R90 rotate by 90 degrees
548 2 R180 rotate by 180 degrees
549 3 R270 rotate by 270 degrees
551 5 FXR90 flip X then rotate by 90 degrees
553 7 FYR90 flip Y then rotate by 90 degrees
557 default_stone.png^[transformFXR90
559 #### `[inventorycube{<top>{<left>{<right>`
561 Escaping does not apply here and `^` is replaced by `&` in texture names
564 Create an inventory cube texture using the side textures.
568 [inventorycube{grass.png{dirt.png&grass_side.png{dirt.png&grass_side.png
570 Creates an inventorycube with `grass.png`, `dirt.png^grass_side.png` and
571 `dirt.png^grass_side.png` textures
573 #### `[lowpart:<percent>:<file>`
575 Blit the lower `<percent>`% part of `<file>` on the texture.
579 base.png^[lowpart:25:overlay.png
581 #### `[verticalframe:<t>:<n>`
583 * `<t>`: animation frame count
584 * `<n>`: current animation frame
586 Crops the texture to a frame of a vertical animation.
590 default_torch_animated.png^[verticalframe:16:8
594 Apply a mask to the base image.
596 The mask is applied using binary AND.
598 #### `[sheet:<w>x<h>:<x>,<y>`
600 Retrieves a tile at position x,y from the base image
601 which it assumes to be a tilesheet with dimensions w,h.
603 #### `[colorize:<color>:<ratio>`
605 Colorize the textures with the given color.
606 `<color>` is specified as a `ColorString`.
607 `<ratio>` is an int ranging from 0 to 255 or the word "`alpha`". If
608 it is an int, then it specifies how far to interpolate between the
609 colors where 0 is only the texture color and 255 is only `<color>`. If
610 omitted, the alpha of `<color>` will be used as the ratio. If it is
611 the word "`alpha`", then each texture pixel will contain the RGB of
612 `<color>` and the alpha of `<color>` multiplied by the alpha of the
615 #### `[multiply:<color>`
617 Multiplies texture colors with the given color.
618 `<color>` is specified as a `ColorString`.
619 Result is more like what you'd expect if you put a color on top of another
620 color, meaning white surfaces get a lot of your new color while black parts
621 don't change very much.
626 The goal of hardware coloring is to simplify the creation of
627 colorful nodes. If your textures use the same pattern, and they only
628 differ in their color (like colored wool blocks), you can use hardware
629 coloring instead of creating and managing many texture files.
630 All of these methods use color multiplication (so a white-black texture
631 with red coloring will result in red-black color).
635 This method is useful if you wish to create nodes/items with
636 the same texture, in different colors, each in a new node/item definition.
640 When you register an item or node, set its `color` field (which accepts a
641 `ColorSpec`) to the desired color.
643 An `ItemStack`'s static color can be overwritten by the `color` metadata
644 field. If you set that field to a `ColorString`, that color will be used.
648 Each tile may have an individual static color, which overwrites every
649 other coloring method. To disable the coloring of a face,
650 set its color to white (because multiplying with white does nothing).
651 You can set the `color` property of the tiles in the node's definition
652 if the tile is in table format.
656 For nodes and items which can have many colors, a palette is more
657 suitable. A palette is a texture, which can contain up to 256 pixels.
658 Each pixel is one possible color for the node/item.
659 You can register one node/item, which can have up to 256 colors.
661 #### Palette indexing
663 When using palettes, you always provide a pixel index for the given
664 node or `ItemStack`. The palette is read from left to right and from
665 top to bottom. If the palette has less than 256 pixels, then it is
666 stretched to contain exactly 256 pixels (after arranging the pixels
667 to one line). The indexing starts from 0.
671 * 16x16 palette, index = 0: the top left corner
672 * 16x16 palette, index = 4: the fifth pixel in the first row
673 * 16x16 palette, index = 16: the pixel below the top left corner
674 * 16x16 palette, index = 255: the bottom right corner
675 * 2 (width) x 4 (height) palette, index = 31: the top left corner.
676 The palette has 8 pixels, so each pixel is stretched to 32 pixels,
677 to ensure the total 256 pixels.
678 * 2x4 palette, index = 32: the top right corner
679 * 2x4 palette, index = 63: the top right corner
680 * 2x4 palette, index = 64: the pixel below the top left corner
682 #### Using palettes with items
684 When registering an item, set the item definition's `palette` field to
685 a texture. You can also use texture modifiers.
687 The `ItemStack`'s color depends on the `palette_index` field of the
688 stack's metadata. `palette_index` is an integer, which specifies the
689 index of the pixel to use.
691 #### Linking palettes with nodes
693 When registering a node, set the item definition's `palette` field to
694 a texture. You can also use texture modifiers.
695 The node's color depends on its `param2`, so you also must set an
696 appropriate `paramtype2`:
698 * `paramtype2 = "color"` for nodes which use their full `param2` for
699 palette indexing. These nodes can have 256 different colors.
700 The palette should contain 256 pixels.
701 * `paramtype2 = "colorwallmounted"` for nodes which use the first
702 five bits (most significant) of `param2` for palette indexing.
703 The remaining three bits are describing rotation, as in `wallmounted`
704 paramtype2. Division by 8 yields the palette index (without stretching the
705 palette). These nodes can have 32 different colors, and the palette
706 should contain 32 pixels.
708 * `param2 = 17` is 2 * 8 + 1, so the rotation is 1 and the third (= 2 + 1)
709 pixel will be picked from the palette.
710 * `param2 = 35` is 4 * 8 + 3, so the rotation is 3 and the fifth (= 4 + 1)
711 pixel will be picked from the palette.
712 * `paramtype2 = "colorfacedir"` for nodes which use the first
713 three bits of `param2` for palette indexing. The remaining
714 five bits are describing rotation, as in `facedir` paramtype2.
715 Division by 32 yields the palette index (without stretching the
716 palette). These nodes can have 8 different colors, and the
717 palette should contain 8 pixels.
719 * `param2 = 17` is 0 * 32 + 17, so the rotation is 17 and the
720 first (= 0 + 1) pixel will be picked from the palette.
721 * `param2 = 35` is 1 * 32 + 3, so the rotation is 3 and the
722 second (= 1 + 1) pixel will be picked from the palette.
724 To colorize a node on the map, set its `param2` value (according
725 to the node's paramtype2).
727 ### Conversion between nodes in the inventory and on the map
729 Static coloring is the same for both cases, there is no need
732 If the `ItemStack`'s metadata contains the `color` field, it will be
733 lost on placement, because nodes on the map can only use palettes.
735 If the `ItemStack`'s metadata contains the `palette_index` field, it is
736 automatically transferred between node and item forms by the engine,
737 when a player digs or places a colored node.
738 You can disable this feature by setting the `drop` field of the node
739 to itself (without metadata).
740 To transfer the color to a special drop, you need a drop table.
744 minetest.register_node("mod:stone", {
745 description = "Stone",
746 tiles = {"default_stone.png"},
747 paramtype2 = "color",
748 palette = "palette.png",
751 -- assume that mod:cobblestone also has the same palette
752 {items = {"mod:cobblestone"}, inherit_color = true },
757 ### Colored items in craft recipes
759 Craft recipes only support item strings, but fortunately item strings
760 can also contain metadata. Example craft recipe registration:
762 minetest.register_craft({
763 output = minetest.itemstring_with_palette("wool:block", 3),
771 To set the `color` field, you can use `minetest.itemstring_with_color`.
773 Metadata field filtering in the `recipe` field are not supported yet,
774 so the craft output is independent of the color of the ingredients.
779 Sometimes hardware coloring is not enough, because it affects the
780 whole tile. Soft texture overlays were added to Minetest to allow
781 the dynamic coloring of only specific parts of the node's texture.
782 For example a grass block may have colored grass, while keeping the
785 These overlays are 'soft', because unlike texture modifiers, the layers
786 are not merged in the memory, but they are simply drawn on top of each
787 other. This allows different hardware coloring, but also means that
788 tiles with overlays are drawn slower. Using too much overlays might
791 For inventory and wield images you can specify overlays which
792 hardware coloring does not modify. You have to set `inventory_overlay`
793 and `wield_overlay` fields to an image name.
795 To define a node overlay, simply set the `overlay_tiles` field of the node
796 definition. These tiles are defined in the same way as plain tiles:
797 they can have a texture name, color etc.
798 To skip one face, set that overlay tile to an empty string.
800 Example (colored grass block):
802 minetest.register_node("default:dirt_with_grass", {
803 description = "Dirt with Grass",
804 -- Regular tiles, as usual
805 -- The dirt tile disables palette coloring
806 tiles = {{name = "default_grass.png"},
807 {name = "default_dirt.png", color = "white"}},
808 -- Overlay tiles: define them in the same style
809 -- The top and bottom tile does not have overlay
810 overlay_tiles = {"", "",
811 {name = "default_grass_side.png"}},
812 -- Global color, used in inventory
814 -- Palette in the world
815 paramtype2 = "color",
816 palette = "default_foilage.png",
825 Only Ogg Vorbis files are supported.
827 For positional playing of sounds, only single-channel (mono) files are
828 supported. Otherwise OpenAL will play them non-positionally.
830 Mods should generally prefix their sounds with `modname_`, e.g. given
831 the mod name "`foomod`", a sound could be called:
835 Sounds are referred to by their name with a dot, a single digit and the
836 file extension stripped out. When a sound is played, the actual sound file
837 is chosen randomly from the matching sounds.
839 When playing the sound `foomod_foosound`, the sound is chosen randomly
840 from the available ones of the following files:
842 * `foomod_foosound.ogg`
843 * `foomod_foosound.0.ogg`
844 * `foomod_foosound.1.ogg`
846 * `foomod_foosound.9.ogg`
848 Examples of sound parameter tables:
850 -- Play locationless on all clients
852 gain = 1.0, -- default
853 fade = 0.0, -- default, change to a value > 0 to fade the sound in
854 pitch = 1.0, -- default
856 -- Play locationless to one player
859 gain = 1.0, -- default
860 fade = 0.0, -- default, change to a value > 0 to fade the sound in
861 pitch = 1.0, -- default
863 -- Play locationless to one player, looped
866 gain = 1.0, -- default
869 -- Play at a location
871 pos = {x = 1, y = 2, z = 3},
872 gain = 1.0, -- default
873 max_hear_distance = 32, -- default, uses an euclidean metric
875 -- Play connected to an object, looped
877 object = <an ObjectRef>,
878 gain = 1.0, -- default
879 max_hear_distance = 32, -- default, uses an euclidean metric
882 -- Play at a location, heard by anyone *but* the given player
884 pos = {x = 32, y = 0, z = 100},
885 max_hear_distance = 40,
886 exclude_player = name,
889 Looped sounds must either be connected to an object or played locationless to
890 one player using `to_player = name`.
892 A positional sound will only be heard by players that are within
893 `max_hear_distance` of the sound position, at the start of the sound.
895 `exclude_player = name` can be applied to locationless, positional and object-
896 bound sounds to exclude a single player from hearing them.
901 Specifies a sound name, gain (=volume) and pitch.
902 This is either a string or a table.
904 In string form, you just specify the sound name or
905 the empty string for no sound.
907 Table form has the following fields:
910 * `gain`: Volume (`1.0` = 100%)
911 * `pitch`: Pitch (`1.0` = 100%)
913 `gain` and `pitch` are optional and default to `1.0`.
919 * `"default_place_node"`: Play e.g. `default_place_node.ogg`
920 * `{name = "default_place_node"}`: Same as above
921 * `{name = "default_place_node", gain = 0.5}`: 50% volume
922 * `{name = "default_place_node", gain = 0.9, pitch = 1.1}`: 90% volume, 110% pitch
927 These sound files are played back by the engine if provided.
929 * `player_damage`: Played when the local player takes damage (gain = 0.5)
930 * `player_falling_damage`: Played when the local player takes
931 damage by falling (gain = 0.5)
932 * `player_jump`: Played when the local player jumps
933 * `default_dig_<groupname>`: Default node digging sound
934 (see node sound definition for details)
936 Registered definitions
937 ======================
939 Anything added using certain [Registration functions] gets added to one or more
940 of the global [Registered definition tables].
942 Note that in some cases you will stumble upon things that are not contained
943 in these tables (e.g. when a mod has been removed). Always check for
944 existence before trying to access the fields.
948 All nodes register with `minetest.register_node` get added to the table
949 `minetest.registered_nodes`.
951 If you want to check the drawtype of a node, you could do:
953 local function get_nodedef_field(nodename, fieldname)
954 if not minetest.registered_nodes[nodename] then
957 return minetest.registered_nodes[nodename][fieldname]
959 local drawtype = get_nodedef_field(nodename, "drawtype")
967 Nodes are the bulk data of the world: cubes and other things that take the
968 space of a cube. Huge amounts of them are handled efficiently, but they
971 The definition of a node is stored and can be accessed by using
973 minetest.registered_nodes[node.name]
975 See [Registered definitions].
977 Nodes are passed by value between Lua and the engine.
978 They are represented by a table:
980 {name="name", param1=num, param2=num}
982 `param1` and `param2` are 8-bit integers ranging from 0 to 255. The engine uses
983 them for certain automated functions. If you don't use these functions, you can
984 use them to store arbitrary values.
989 The functions of `param1` and `param2` are determined by certain fields in the
992 The function of `param1` is determined by `paramtype` in node definition.
993 `param1` is reserved for the engine when `paramtype != "none"`.
995 * `paramtype = "light"`
996 * The value stores light with and without sun in its upper and lower 4 bits
998 * Required by a light source node to enable spreading its light.
999 * Required by the following drawtypes as they determine their visual
1000 brightness from their internal light value:
1010 * `paramtype = "none"`
1011 * `param1` will not be used by the engine and can be used to store
1014 The function of `param2` is determined by `paramtype2` in node definition.
1015 `param2` is reserved for the engine when `paramtype2 != "none"`.
1017 * `paramtype2 = "flowingliquid"`
1018 * Used by `drawtype = "flowingliquid"` and `liquidtype = "flowing"`
1019 * The liquid level and a flag of the liquid are stored in `param2`
1020 * Bits 0-2: Liquid level (0-7). The higher, the more liquid is in this node;
1021 see `minetest.get_node_level`, `minetest.set_node_level` and `minetest.add_node_level`
1022 to access/manipulate the content of this field
1023 * Bit 3: If set, liquid is flowing downwards (no graphical effect)
1024 * `paramtype2 = "wallmounted"`
1025 * Supported drawtypes: "torchlike", "signlike", "normal", "nodebox", "mesh"
1026 * The rotation of the node is stored in `param2`
1027 * You can make this value by using `minetest.dir_to_wallmounted()`
1028 * Values range 0 - 5
1029 * The value denotes at which direction the node is "mounted":
1030 0 = y+, 1 = y-, 2 = x+, 3 = x-, 4 = z+, 5 = z-
1031 * `paramtype2 = "facedir"`
1032 * Supported drawtypes: "normal", "nodebox", "mesh"
1033 * The rotation of the node is stored in `param2`. Furnaces and chests are
1034 rotated this way. Can be made by using `minetest.dir_to_facedir()`.
1035 * Values range 0 - 23
1036 * facedir / 4 = axis direction:
1037 0 = y+, 1 = z+, 2 = z-, 3 = x+, 4 = x-, 5 = y-
1038 * facedir modulo 4 = rotation around that axis
1039 * `paramtype2 = "leveled"`
1040 * Only valid for "nodebox" with 'type = "leveled"', and "plantlike_rooted".
1042 * The level of the top face of the nodebox is stored in `param2`.
1043 * The other faces are defined by 'fixed = {}' like 'type = "fixed"'
1045 * The nodebox height is (`param2` / 64) nodes.
1046 * The maximum accepted value of `param2` is 127.
1048 * The height of the 'plantlike' section is stored in `param2`.
1049 * The height is (`param2` / 16) nodes.
1050 * `paramtype2 = "degrotate"`
1051 * Valid for `plantlike` and `mesh` drawtypes. The rotation of the node is
1053 * Values range 0–239. The value stored in `param2` is multiplied by 1.5 to
1054 get the actual rotation in degrees of the node.
1055 * `paramtype2 = "meshoptions"`
1056 * Only valid for "plantlike" drawtype. `param2` encodes the shape and
1057 optional modifiers of the "plant". `param2` is a bitfield.
1058 * Bits 0 to 2 select the shape.
1059 Use only one of the values below:
1060 * 0 = a "x" shaped plant (ordinary plant)
1061 * 1 = a "+" shaped plant (just rotated 45 degrees)
1062 * 2 = a "*" shaped plant with 3 faces instead of 2
1063 * 3 = a "#" shaped plant with 4 faces instead of 2
1064 * 4 = a "#" shaped plant with 4 faces that lean outwards
1065 * 5-7 are unused and reserved for future meshes.
1066 * Bits 3 to 7 are used to enable any number of optional modifiers.
1067 Just add the corresponding value(s) below to `param2`:
1068 * 8 - Makes the plant slightly vary placement horizontally
1069 * 16 - Makes the plant mesh 1.4x larger
1070 * 32 - Moves each face randomly a small bit down (1/8 max)
1071 * values 64 and 128 (bits 6-7) are reserved for future use.
1072 * Example: `param2 = 0` selects a normal "x" shaped plant
1073 * Example: `param2 = 17` selects a "+" shaped plant, 1.4x larger (1+16)
1074 * `paramtype2 = "color"`
1075 * `param2` tells which color is picked from the palette.
1076 The palette should have 256 pixels.
1077 * `paramtype2 = "colorfacedir"`
1078 * Same as `facedir`, but with colors.
1079 * The first three bits of `param2` tells which color is picked from the
1080 palette. The palette should have 8 pixels.
1081 * `paramtype2 = "colorwallmounted"`
1082 * Same as `wallmounted`, but with colors.
1083 * The first five bits of `param2` tells which color is picked from the
1084 palette. The palette should have 32 pixels.
1085 * `paramtype2 = "glasslikeliquidlevel"`
1086 * Only valid for "glasslike_framed" or "glasslike_framed_optional"
1088 * `param2` values 0-63 define 64 levels of internal liquid, 0 being empty
1090 * Liquid texture is defined using `special_tiles = {"modname_tilename.png"}`
1091 * `paramtype2 = "colordegrotate"`
1092 * Same as `degrotate`, but with colors.
1093 * The first (most-significant) three bits of `param2` tells which color
1094 is picked from the palette. The palette should have 8 pixels.
1095 * Remaining 5 bits store rotation in range 0–23 (i.e. in 15° steps)
1096 * `paramtype2 = "none"`
1097 * `param2` will not be used by the engine and can be used to store
1100 Nodes can also contain extra data. See [Node Metadata].
1105 There are a bunch of different looking node types.
1107 Look for examples in `games/devtest` or `games/minetest_game`.
1110 * A node-sized cube.
1112 * Invisible, uses no texture.
1114 * The cubic source node for a liquid.
1116 * The flowing version of a liquid, appears with various heights and slopes.
1118 * Often used for partially-transparent nodes.
1119 * Only external sides of textures are visible.
1120 * `glasslike_framed`
1121 * All face-connected nodes are drawn as one volume within a surrounding
1123 * The frame appearance is generated from the edges of the first texture
1124 specified in `tiles`. The width of the edges used are 1/16th of texture
1125 size: 1 pixel for 16x16, 2 pixels for 32x32 etc.
1126 * The glass 'shine' (or other desired detail) on each node face is supplied
1127 by the second texture specified in `tiles`.
1128 * `glasslike_framed_optional`
1129 * This switches between the above 2 drawtypes according to the menu setting
1132 * Often used for partially-transparent nodes.
1133 * External and internal sides of textures are visible.
1134 * `allfaces_optional`
1135 * Often used for leaves nodes.
1136 * This switches between `normal`, `glasslike` and `allfaces` according to
1137 the menu setting: Opaque Leaves / Simple Leaves / Fancy Leaves.
1138 * With 'Simple Leaves' selected, the texture specified in `special_tiles`
1139 is used instead, if present. This allows a visually thicker texture to be
1140 used to compensate for how `glasslike` reduces visual thickness.
1142 * A single vertical texture.
1143 * If placed on top of a node, uses the first texture specified in `tiles`.
1144 * If placed against the underside of a node, uses the second texture
1145 specified in `tiles`.
1146 * If placed on the side of a node, uses the third texture specified in
1147 `tiles` and is perpendicular to that node.
1149 * A single texture parallel to, and mounted against, the top, underside or
1152 * Two vertical and diagonal textures at right-angles to each other.
1153 * See `paramtype2 = "meshoptions"` above for other options.
1155 * When above a flat surface, appears as 6 textures, the central 2 as
1156 `plantlike` plus 4 more surrounding those.
1157 * If not above a surface the central 2 do not appear, but the texture
1158 appears against the faces of surrounding nodes if they are present.
1160 * A 3D model suitable for a wooden fence.
1161 * One placed node appears as a single vertical post.
1162 * Adjacently-placed nodes cause horizontal bars to appear between them.
1164 * Often used for tracks for mining carts.
1165 * Requires 4 textures to be specified in `tiles`, in order: Straight,
1166 curved, t-junction, crossing.
1167 * Each placed node automatically switches to a suitable rotated texture
1168 determined by the adjacent `raillike` nodes, in order to create a
1169 continuous track network.
1170 * Becomes a sloping node if placed against stepped nodes.
1172 * Often used for stairs and slabs.
1173 * Allows defining nodes consisting of an arbitrary number of boxes.
1174 * See [Node boxes] below for more information.
1176 * Uses models for nodes.
1177 * Tiles should hold model materials textures.
1178 * Only static meshes are implemented.
1179 * For supported model formats see Irrlicht engine documentation.
1180 * `plantlike_rooted`
1181 * Enables underwater `plantlike` without air bubbles around the nodes.
1182 * Consists of a base cube at the co-ordinates of the node plus a
1183 `plantlike` extension above with a height of `param2 / 16` nodes.
1184 * The `plantlike` extension visually passes through any nodes above the
1185 base cube without affecting them.
1186 * The base cube texture tiles are defined as normal, the `plantlike`
1187 extension uses the defined special tile, for example:
1188 `special_tiles = {{name = "default_papyrus.png"}},`
1190 `*_optional` drawtypes need less rendering time if deactivated
1191 (always client-side).
1196 Node selection boxes are defined using "node boxes".
1198 A nodebox is defined as any of:
1201 -- A normal cube; the default in most things
1205 -- A fixed box (or boxes) (facedir param2 is used, if applicable)
1207 fixed = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1210 -- A variable height box (or boxes) with the top face position defined
1211 -- by the node parameter 'leveled = ', or if 'paramtype2 == "leveled"'
1213 -- Other faces are defined by 'fixed = {}' as with 'type = "fixed"'.
1215 fixed = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1218 -- A box like the selection box for torches
1219 -- (wallmounted param2 is used, if applicable)
1220 type = "wallmounted",
1226 -- A node that has optional boxes depending on neighbouring nodes'
1227 -- presence and type. See also `connects_to`.
1229 fixed = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1230 connect_top = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1231 connect_bottom = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1232 connect_front = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1233 connect_left = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1234 connect_back = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1235 connect_right = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1236 -- The following `disconnected_*` boxes are the opposites of the
1237 -- `connect_*` ones above, i.e. when a node has no suitable neighbour
1238 -- on the respective side, the corresponding disconnected box is drawn.
1239 disconnected_top = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1240 disconnected_bottom = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1241 disconnected_front = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1242 disconnected_left = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1243 disconnected_back = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1244 disconnected_right = box OR {box1, box2, ...}
1245 disconnected = box OR {box1, box2, ...} -- when there is *no* neighbour
1246 disconnected_sides = box OR {box1, box2, ...} -- when there are *no*
1247 -- neighbours to the sides
1250 A `box` is defined as:
1252 {x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2}
1254 A box of a regular node would look like:
1256 {-0.5, -0.5, -0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5},
1258 To avoid collision issues, keep each value within the range of +/- 1.45.
1259 This also applies to leveled nodeboxes, where the final height shall not
1260 exceed this soft limit.
1264 Map terminology and coordinates
1265 ===============================
1267 Nodes, mapblocks, mapchunks
1268 ---------------------------
1270 A 'node' is the fundamental cubic unit of a world and appears to a player as
1271 roughly 1x1x1 meters in size.
1273 A 'mapblock' (often abbreviated to 'block') is 16x16x16 nodes and is the
1274 fundamental region of a world that is stored in the world database, sent to
1275 clients and handled by many parts of the engine.
1276 'mapblock' is preferred terminology to 'block' to help avoid confusion with
1277 'node', however 'block' often appears in the API.
1279 A 'mapchunk' (sometimes abbreviated to 'chunk') is usually 5x5x5 mapblocks
1280 (80x80x80 nodes) and is the volume of world generated in one operation by
1282 The size in mapblocks has been chosen to optimise map generation.
1287 ### Orientation of axes
1289 For node and mapblock coordinates, +X is East, +Y is up, +Z is North.
1291 ### Node coordinates
1293 Almost all positions used in the API use node coordinates.
1295 ### Mapblock coordinates
1297 Occasionally the API uses 'blockpos' which refers to mapblock coordinates that
1298 specify a particular mapblock.
1299 For example blockpos (0,0,0) specifies the mapblock that extends from
1300 node position (0,0,0) to node position (15,15,15).
1302 #### Converting node position to the containing blockpos
1304 To calculate the blockpos of the mapblock that contains the node at 'nodepos',
1307 * blockpos = math.floor(nodepos / 16)
1309 #### Converting blockpos to min/max node positions
1311 To calculate the min/max node positions contained in the mapblock at 'blockpos',
1315 nodepos = blockpos * 16
1317 nodepos = blockpos * 16 + 15
1328 The position field is used for all element types.
1330 To account for differing resolutions, the position coordinates are the
1331 percentage of the screen, ranging in value from `0` to `1`.
1333 The name field is not yet used, but should contain a description of what the
1334 HUD element represents.
1336 The `direction` field is the direction in which something is drawn.
1337 `0` draws from left to right, `1` draws from right to left, `2` draws from
1338 top to bottom, and `3` draws from bottom to top.
1340 The `alignment` field specifies how the item will be aligned. It is a table
1341 where `x` and `y` range from `-1` to `1`, with `0` being central. `-1` is
1342 moved to the left/up, and `1` is to the right/down. Fractional values can be
1345 The `offset` field specifies a pixel offset from the position. Contrary to
1346 position, the offset is not scaled to screen size. This allows for some
1347 precisely positioned items in the HUD.
1349 **Note**: `offset` _will_ adapt to screen DPI as well as user defined scaling
1352 The `z_index` field specifies the order of HUD elements from back to front.
1353 Lower z-index elements are displayed behind higher z-index elements. Elements
1354 with same z-index are displayed in an arbitrary order. Default 0.
1355 Supports negative values. By convention, the following values are recommended:
1357 * -400: Graphical effects, such as vignette
1358 * -300: Name tags, waypoints
1360 * -100: Things that block the player's view, e.g. masks
1361 * 0: Default. For standard in-game HUD elements like crosshair, hotbar,
1362 minimap, builtin statbars, etc.
1363 * 100: Temporary text messages or notification icons
1364 * 1000: Full-screen effects such as full-black screen or credits.
1365 This includes effects that cover the entire screen
1366 * Other: If your HUD element doesn't fit into any category, pick a number
1367 between the suggested values
1371 Below are the specific uses for fields in each type; fields not listed for that
1376 Displays an image on the HUD.
1378 * `scale`: The scale of the image, with 1 being the original texture size.
1379 Only the X coordinate scale is used (positive values).
1380 Negative values represent that percentage of the screen it
1381 should take; e.g. `x=-100` means 100% (width).
1382 * `text`: The name of the texture that is displayed.
1383 * `alignment`: The alignment of the image.
1384 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1388 Displays text on the HUD.
1390 * `scale`: Defines the bounding rectangle of the text.
1391 A value such as `{x=100, y=100}` should work.
1392 * `text`: The text to be displayed in the HUD element.
1393 * `number`: An integer containing the RGB value of the color used to draw the
1394 text. Specify `0xFFFFFF` for white text, `0xFF0000` for red, and so on.
1395 * `alignment`: The alignment of the text.
1396 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1397 * `size`: size of the text.
1398 The player-set font size is multiplied by size.x (y value isn't used).
1402 Displays a horizontal bar made up of half-images with an optional background.
1404 * `text`: The name of the texture to use.
1405 * `text2`: Optional texture name to enable a background / "off state"
1406 texture (useful to visualize the maximal value). Both textures
1407 must have the same size.
1408 * `number`: The number of half-textures that are displayed.
1409 If odd, will end with a vertically center-split texture.
1410 * `item`: Same as `number` but for the "off state" texture
1411 * `direction`: To which direction the images will extend to
1412 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1413 * `size`: If used, will force full-image size to this value (override texture
1418 * `text`: The name of the inventory list to be displayed.
1419 * `number`: Number of items in the inventory to be displayed.
1420 * `item`: Position of item that is selected.
1422 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1426 Displays distance to selected world position.
1428 * `name`: The name of the waypoint.
1429 * `text`: Distance suffix. Can be blank.
1430 * `precision`: Waypoint precision, integer >= 0. Defaults to 10.
1431 If set to 0, distance is not shown. Shown value is `floor(distance*precision)/precision`.
1432 When the precision is an integer multiple of 10, there will be `log_10(precision)` digits after the decimal point.
1433 `precision = 1000`, for example, will show 3 decimal places (eg: `0.999`).
1434 `precision = 2` will show multiples of `0.5`; precision = 5 will show multiples of `0.2` and so on:
1435 `precision = n` will show multiples of `1/n`
1436 * `number:` An integer containing the RGB value of the color used to draw the
1438 * `world_pos`: World position of the waypoint.
1439 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1440 * `alignment`: The alignment of the waypoint.
1442 ### `image_waypoint`
1444 Same as `image`, but does not accept a `position`; the position is instead determined by `world_pos`, the world position of the waypoint.
1446 * `scale`: The scale of the image, with 1 being the original texture size.
1447 Only the X coordinate scale is used (positive values).
1448 Negative values represent that percentage of the screen it
1449 should take; e.g. `x=-100` means 100% (width).
1450 * `text`: The name of the texture that is displayed.
1451 * `alignment`: The alignment of the image.
1452 * `world_pos`: World position of the waypoint.
1453 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1457 Displays an image oriented or translated according to current heading direction.
1459 * `size`: The size of this element. Negative values represent percentage
1460 of the screen; e.g. `x=-100` means 100% (width).
1461 * `scale`: Scale of the translated image (used only for dir = 2 or dir = 3).
1462 * `text`: The name of the texture to use.
1463 * `alignment`: The alignment of the image.
1464 * `offset`: Offset in pixels from position.
1465 * `dir`: How the image is rotated/translated:
1466 * 0 - Rotate as heading direction
1467 * 1 - Rotate in reverse direction
1468 * 2 - Translate as landscape direction
1469 * 3 - Translate in reverse direction
1471 If translation is chosen, texture is repeated horizontally to fill the whole element.
1475 Displays a minimap on the HUD.
1477 * `size`: Size of the minimap to display. Minimap should be a square to avoid
1479 * `alignment`: The alignment of the minimap.
1480 * `offset`: offset in pixels from position.
1482 Representations of simple things
1483 ================================
1488 {x=num, y=num, z=num}
1490 For helper functions see [Spatial Vectors].
1495 * `{type="nothing"}`
1496 * `{type="node", under=pos, above=pos}`
1497 * Indicates a pointed node selection box.
1498 * `under` refers to the node position behind the pointed face.
1499 * `above` refers to the node position in front of the pointed face.
1500 * `{type="object", ref=ObjectRef}`
1502 Exact pointing location (currently only `Raycast` supports these fields):
1504 * `pointed_thing.intersection_point`: The absolute world coordinates of the
1505 point on the selection box which is pointed at. May be in the selection box
1506 if the pointer is in the box too.
1507 * `pointed_thing.box_id`: The ID of the pointed selection box (counting starts
1509 * `pointed_thing.intersection_normal`: Unit vector, points outwards of the
1510 selected selection box. This specifies which face is pointed at.
1511 Is a null vector `{x = 0, y = 0, z = 0}` when the pointer is inside the
1517 Flag Specifier Format
1518 =====================
1520 Flags using the standardized flag specifier format can be specified in either
1521 of two ways, by string or table.
1523 The string format is a comma-delimited set of flag names; whitespace and
1524 unrecognized flag fields are ignored. Specifying a flag in the string sets the
1525 flag, and specifying a flag prefixed by the string `"no"` explicitly
1526 clears the flag from whatever the default may be.
1528 In addition to the standard string flag format, the schematic flags field can
1529 also be a table of flag names to boolean values representing whether or not the
1530 flag is set. Additionally, if a field with the flag name prefixed with `"no"`
1531 is present, mapped to a boolean of any value, the specified flag is unset.
1533 E.g. A flag field of value
1535 {place_center_x = true, place_center_y=false, place_center_z=true}
1539 {place_center_x = true, noplace_center_y=true, place_center_z=true}
1541 which is equivalent to
1543 "place_center_x, noplace_center_y, place_center_z"
1547 "place_center_x, place_center_z"
1549 since, by default, no schematic attributes are set.
1560 There are three kinds of items: nodes, tools and craftitems.
1562 * Node: Can be placed in the world's voxel grid
1563 * Tool: Has a wear property but cannot be stacked. The default use action is to
1564 dig nodes or hit objects according to its tool capabilities.
1565 * Craftitem: Cannot dig nodes or be placed
1570 All item stacks have an amount between 0 and 65535. It is 1 by
1571 default. Tool item stacks can not have an amount greater than 1.
1573 Tools use a wear (damage) value ranging from 0 to 65535. The
1574 value 0 is the default and is used for unworn tools. The values
1575 1 to 65535 are used for worn tools, where a higher value stands for
1576 a higher wear. Non-tools always have a wear value of 0.
1581 Items and item stacks can exist in three formats: Serializes, table format
1584 When an item must be passed to a function, it can usually be in any of
1589 This is called "stackstring" or "itemstring". It is a simple string with
1590 1-3 components: the full item identifier, an optional amount and an optional
1593 <identifier> [<amount>[ <wear>]]
1597 * `'default:apple'`: 1 apple
1598 * `'default:dirt 5'`: 5 dirt
1599 * `'default:pick_stone'`: a new stone pickaxe
1600 * `'default:pick_wood 1 21323'`: a wooden pickaxe, ca. 1/3 worn out
1608 {name="default:dirt", count=5, wear=0, metadata=""}
1610 A wooden pick about 1/3 worn out:
1612 {name="default:pick_wood", count=1, wear=21323, metadata=""}
1616 {name="default:apple", count=1, wear=0, metadata=""}
1620 A native C++ format with many helper methods. Useful for converting
1621 between formats. See the [Class reference] section for details.
1629 In a number of places, there is a group table. Groups define the
1630 properties of a thing (item, node, armor of entity, capabilities of
1631 tool) in such a way that the engine and other mods can can interact with
1632 the thing without actually knowing what the thing is.
1637 Groups are stored in a table, having the group names with keys and the
1638 group ratings as values. Group ratings are integer values within the
1639 range [-32767, 32767]. For example:
1642 groups = {crumbly=3, soil=1}
1644 -- A more special dirt-kind of thing
1645 groups = {crumbly=2, soil=1, level=2, outerspace=1}
1647 Groups always have a rating associated with them. If there is no
1648 useful meaning for a rating for an enabled group, it shall be `1`.
1650 When not defined, the rating of a group defaults to `0`. Thus when you
1651 read groups, you must interpret `nil` and `0` as the same value, `0`.
1653 You can read the rating of a group for an item or a node by using
1655 minetest.get_item_group(itemname, groupname)
1660 Groups of items can define what kind of an item it is (e.g. wool).
1665 In addition to the general item things, groups are used to define whether
1666 a node is destroyable and how long it takes to destroy by a tool.
1671 For entities, groups are, as of now, used only for calculating damage.
1672 The rating is the percentage of damage caused by tools with this damage group.
1673 See [Entity damage mechanism].
1675 object.get_armor_groups() --> a group-rating table (e.g. {fleshy=100})
1676 object.set_armor_groups({fleshy=30, cracky=80})
1681 Groups in tools define which groups of nodes and entities they are
1684 Groups in crafting recipes
1685 --------------------------
1687 An example: Make meat soup from any meat, any water and any bowl:
1690 output = 'food:meat_soup_raw',
1696 -- preserve = {'group:bowl'}, -- Not implemented yet (TODO)
1699 Another example: Make red wool from white wool and red dye:
1703 output = 'wool:red',
1704 recipe = {'wool:white', 'group:dye,basecolor_red'},
1710 The asterisk `(*)` after a group name describes that there is no engine
1711 functionality bound to it, and implementation is left up as a suggestion
1714 ### Node, item and tool groups
1716 * `not_in_creative_inventory`: (*) Special group for inventory mods to indicate
1717 that the item should be hidden in item lists.
1720 ### Node-only groups
1722 * `attached_node`: if the node under it is not a walkable block the node will be
1723 dropped as an item. If the node is wallmounted the wallmounted direction is
1725 * `bouncy`: value is bounce speed in percent
1726 * `connect_to_raillike`: makes nodes of raillike drawtype with same group value
1727 connect to each other
1728 * `dig_immediate`: Player can always pick up node without reducing tool wear
1729 * `2`: the node always gets the digging time 0.5 seconds (rail, sign)
1730 * `3`: the node always gets the digging time 0 seconds (torch)
1731 * `disable_jump`: Player (and possibly other things) cannot jump from node
1732 or if their feet are in the node. Note: not supported for `new_move = false`
1733 * `fall_damage_add_percent`: damage speed = `speed * (1 + value/100)`
1734 * `falling_node`: if there is no walkable block under the node it will fall
1735 * `float`: the node will not fall through liquids
1736 * `level`: Can be used to give an additional sense of progression in the game.
1737 * A larger level will cause e.g. a weapon of a lower level make much less
1738 damage, and get worn out much faster, or not be able to get drops
1739 from destroyed nodes.
1740 * `0` is something that is directly accessible at the start of gameplay
1741 * There is no upper limit
1742 * See also: `leveldiff` in [Tools]
1743 * `slippery`: Players and items will slide on the node.
1744 Slipperiness rises steadily with `slippery` value, starting at 1.
1747 ### Tool-only groups
1749 * `disable_repair`: If set to 1 for a tool, it cannot be repaired using the
1750 `"toolrepair"` crafting recipe
1753 ### `ObjectRef` groups
1755 * `immortal`: Skips all damage and breath handling for an object. This group
1756 will also hide the integrated HUD status bars for players. It is
1757 automatically set to all players when damage is disabled on the server and
1758 cannot be reset (subject to change).
1759 * `punch_operable`: For entities; disables the regular damage mechanism for
1760 players punching it by hand or a non-tool item, so that it can do something
1761 else than take damage.
1765 Known damage and digging time defining groups
1766 ---------------------------------------------
1768 * `crumbly`: dirt, sand
1769 * `cracky`: tough but crackable stuff like stone.
1770 * `snappy`: something that can be cut using fine tools; e.g. leaves, small
1771 plants, wire, sheets of metal
1772 * `choppy`: something that can be cut using force; e.g. trees, wooden planks
1773 * `fleshy`: Living things like animals and the player. This could imply
1774 some blood effects when hitting.
1775 * `explody`: Especially prone to explosions
1776 * `oddly_breakable_by_hand`:
1777 Can be added to nodes that shouldn't logically be breakable by the
1778 hand but are. Somewhat similar to `dig_immediate`, but times are more
1779 like `{[1]=3.50,[2]=2.00,[3]=0.70}` and this does not override the
1780 speed of a tool if the tool can dig at a faster speed than this
1781 suggests for the hand.
1783 Examples of custom groups
1784 -------------------------
1786 Item groups are often used for defining, well, _groups of items_.
1788 * `meat`: any meat-kind of a thing (rating might define the size or healing
1789 ability or be irrelevant -- it is not defined as of yet)
1790 * `eatable`: anything that can be eaten. Rating might define HP gain in half
1792 * `flammable`: can be set on fire. Rating might define the intensity of the
1793 fire, affecting e.g. the speed of the spreading of an open fire.
1794 * `wool`: any wool (any origin, any color)
1795 * `metal`: any metal
1796 * `weapon`: any weapon
1797 * `heavy`: anything considerably heavy
1799 Digging time calculation specifics
1800 ----------------------------------
1802 Groups such as `crumbly`, `cracky` and `snappy` are used for this
1803 purpose. Rating is `1`, `2` or `3`. A higher rating for such a group implies
1804 faster digging time.
1806 The `level` group is used to limit the toughness of nodes a tool can dig
1807 and to scale the digging times / damage to a greater extent.
1809 **Please do understand this**, otherwise you cannot use the system to it's
1812 Tools define their properties by a list of parameters for groups. They
1813 cannot dig other groups; thus it is important to use a standard bunch of
1814 groups to enable interaction with tools.
1827 * Full punch interval
1828 * Maximum drop level
1829 * For an arbitrary list of groups:
1830 * Uses (until the tool breaks)
1831 * Maximum level (usually `0`, `1`, `2` or `3`)
1835 ### Full punch interval
1837 When used as a weapon, the tool will do full damage if this time is spent
1838 between punches. If e.g. half the time is spent, the tool will do half
1841 ### Maximum drop level
1843 Suggests the maximum level of node, when dug with the tool, that will drop
1844 it's useful item. (e.g. iron ore to drop a lump of iron).
1846 This is not automated; it is the responsibility of the node definition
1851 Determines how many uses the tool has when it is used for digging a node,
1852 of this group, of the maximum level. For lower leveled nodes, the use count
1853 is multiplied by `3^leveldiff`.
1854 `leveldiff` is the difference of the tool's `maxlevel` `groupcaps` and the
1855 node's `level` group. The node cannot be dug if `leveldiff` is less than zero.
1857 * `uses=10, leveldiff=0`: actual uses: 10
1858 * `uses=10, leveldiff=1`: actual uses: 30
1859 * `uses=10, leveldiff=2`: actual uses: 90
1863 Tells what is the maximum level of a node of this group that the tool will
1868 List of digging times for different ratings of the group, for nodes of the
1871 For example, as a Lua table, `times={2=2.00, 3=0.70}`. This would
1872 result in the tool to be able to dig nodes that have a rating of `2` or `3`
1873 for this group, and unable to dig the rating `1`, which is the toughest.
1874 Unless there is a matching group that enables digging otherwise.
1876 If the result digging time is 0, a delay of 0.15 seconds is added between
1877 digging nodes; If the player releases LMB after digging, this delay is set to 0,
1878 i.e. players can more quickly click the nodes away instead of holding LMB.
1882 List of damage for groups of entities. See [Entity damage mechanism].
1884 Example definition of the capabilities of a tool
1885 ------------------------------------------------
1887 tool_capabilities = {
1888 full_punch_interval=1.5,
1891 crumbly={maxlevel=2, uses=20, times={[1]=1.60, [2]=1.20, [3]=0.80}}
1893 damage_groups = {fleshy=2},
1896 This makes the tool be able to dig nodes that fulfil both of these:
1898 * Have the `crumbly` group
1899 * Have a `level` group less or equal to `2`
1901 Table of resulting digging times:
1903 crumbly 0 1 2 3 4 <- level
1905 1 0.80 1.60 1.60 - -
1906 2 0.60 1.20 1.20 - -
1907 3 0.40 0.80 0.80 - -
1909 level diff: 2 1 0 -1 -2
1911 Table of resulting tool uses:
1920 * At `crumbly==0`, the node is not diggable.
1921 * At `crumbly==3`, the level difference digging time divider kicks in and makes
1922 easy nodes to be quickly breakable.
1923 * At `level > 2`, the node is not diggable, because it's `level > maxlevel`
1928 Entity damage mechanism
1929 =======================
1934 foreach group in cap.damage_groups:
1935 damage += cap.damage_groups[group]
1936 * limit(actual_interval / cap.full_punch_interval, 0.0, 1.0)
1937 * (object.armor_groups[group] / 100.0)
1938 -- Where object.armor_groups[group] is 0 for inexistent values
1941 Client predicts damage based on damage groups. Because of this, it is able to
1942 give an immediate response when an entity is damaged or dies; the response is
1943 pre-defined somehow (e.g. by defining a sprite animation) (not implemented;
1945 Currently a smoke puff will appear when an entity dies.
1947 The group `immortal` completely disables normal damage.
1949 Entities can define a special armor group, which is `punch_operable`. This
1950 group disables the regular damage mechanism for players punching it by hand or
1951 a non-tool item, so that it can do something else than take damage.
1953 On the Lua side, every punch calls:
1955 entity:on_punch(puncher, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, direction,
1958 This should never be called directly, because damage is usually not handled by
1961 * `puncher` is the object performing the punch. Can be `nil`. Should never be
1962 accessed unless absolutely required, to encourage interoperability.
1963 * `time_from_last_punch` is time from last punch (by `puncher`) or `nil`.
1964 * `tool_capabilities` can be `nil`.
1965 * `direction` is a unit vector, pointing from the source of the punch to
1967 * `damage` damage that will be done to entity
1968 Return value of this function will determine if damage is done by this function
1969 (retval true) or shall be done by engine (retval false)
1971 To punch an entity/object in Lua, call:
1973 object:punch(puncher, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, direction)
1975 * Return value is tool wear.
1976 * Parameters are equal to the above callback.
1977 * If `direction` equals `nil` and `puncher` does not equal `nil`, `direction`
1978 will be automatically filled in based on the location of `puncher`.
1989 The instance of a node in the world normally only contains the three values
1990 mentioned in [Nodes]. However, it is possible to insert extra data into a node.
1991 It is called "node metadata"; See `NodeMetaRef`.
1993 Node metadata contains two things:
1998 Some of the values in the key-value store are handled specially:
2000 * `formspec`: Defines a right-click inventory menu. See [Formspec].
2001 * `infotext`: Text shown on the screen when the node is pointed at
2005 local meta = minetest.get_meta(pos)
2006 meta:set_string("formspec",
2008 "list[context;main;0,0;8,4;]"..
2009 "list[current_player;main;0,5;8,4;]")
2010 meta:set_string("infotext", "Chest");
2011 local inv = meta:get_inventory()
2012 inv:set_size("main", 8*4)
2013 print(dump(meta:to_table()))
2016 main = {[1] = "default:dirt", [2] = "", [3] = "", [4] = "",
2017 [5] = "", [6] = "", [7] = "", [8] = "", [9] = "",
2018 [10] = "", [11] = "", [12] = "", [13] = "",
2019 [14] = "default:cobble", [15] = "", [16] = "", [17] = "",
2020 [18] = "", [19] = "", [20] = "default:cobble", [21] = "",
2021 [22] = "", [23] = "", [24] = "", [25] = "", [26] = "",
2022 [27] = "", [28] = "", [29] = "", [30] = "", [31] = "",
2026 formspec = "size[8,9]list[context;main;0,0;8,4;]list[current_player;main;0,5;8,4;]",
2034 Item stacks can store metadata too. See [`ItemStackMetaRef`].
2036 Item metadata only contains a key-value store.
2038 Some of the values in the key-value store are handled specially:
2040 * `description`: Set the item stack's description.
2041 See also: `get_description` in [`ItemStack`]
2042 * `short_description`: Set the item stack's short description.
2043 See also: `get_short_description` in [`ItemStack`]
2044 * `color`: A `ColorString`, which sets the stack's color.
2045 * `palette_index`: If the item has a palette, this is used to get the
2046 current color from the palette.
2050 local meta = stack:get_meta()
2051 meta:set_string("key", "value")
2052 print(dump(meta:to_table()))
2060 Formspec defines a menu. This supports inventories and some of the
2061 typical widgets like buttons, checkboxes, text input fields, etc.
2062 It is a string, with a somewhat strange format.
2064 A formspec is made out of formspec elements, which includes widgets
2065 like buttons but also can be used to set stuff like background color.
2067 Many formspec elements have a `name`, which is a unique identifier which
2068 is used when the server receives user input. You must not use the name
2069 "quit" for formspec elements.
2071 Spaces and newlines can be inserted between the blocks, as is used in the
2074 Position and size units are inventory slots unless the new coordinate system
2075 is enabled. `X` and `Y` position the formspec element relative to the top left
2076 of the menu or container. `W` and `H` are its width and height values.
2078 If the new system is enabled, all elements have unified coordinates for all
2079 elements with no padding or spacing in between. This is highly recommended
2080 for new forms. See `real_coordinates[<bool>]` and `Migrating to Real
2083 Inventories with a `player:<name>` inventory location are only sent to the
2084 player named `<name>`.
2086 When displaying text which can contain formspec code, e.g. text set by a player,
2087 use `minetest.formspec_escape`.
2088 For coloured text you can use `minetest.colorize`.
2090 Since formspec version 3, elements drawn in the order they are defined. All
2091 background elements are drawn before all other elements.
2093 **WARNING**: do _not_ use a element name starting with `key_`; those names are
2094 reserved to pass key press events to formspec!
2096 **WARNING**: Minetest allows you to add elements to every single formspec instance
2097 using `player:set_formspec_prepend()`, which may be the reason backgrounds are
2098 appearing when you don't expect them to, or why things are styled differently
2099 to normal. See [`no_prepend[]`] and [Styling Formspecs].
2107 list[context;main;0,0;8,4;]
2108 list[current_player;main;0,5;8,4;]
2113 list[context;fuel;2,3;1,1;]
2114 list[context;src;2,1;1,1;]
2115 list[context;dst;5,1;2,2;]
2116 list[current_player;main;0,5;8,4;]
2118 ### Minecraft-like player inventory
2121 image[1,0.6;1,2;player.png]
2122 list[current_player;main;0,3.5;8,4;]
2123 list[current_player;craft;3,0;3,3;]
2124 list[current_player;craftpreview;7,1;1,1;]
2129 * FORMSPEC VERSION 1:
2131 * FORMSPEC VERSION 2:
2132 * Forced real coordinates
2133 * background9[]: 9-slice scaling parameters
2134 * FORMSPEC VERSION 3:
2135 * Formspec elements are drawn in the order of definition
2136 * bgcolor[]: use 3 parameters (bgcolor, formspec (now an enum), fbgcolor)
2137 * box[] and image[] elements enable clipping by default
2138 * new element: scroll_container[]
2139 * FORMSPEC VERSION 4:
2140 * Allow dropdown indexing events
2145 ### `formspec_version[<version>]`
2147 * Set the formspec version to a certain number. If not specified,
2148 version 1 is assumed.
2149 * Must be specified before `size` element.
2150 * Clients older than this version can neither show newer elements nor display
2151 elements with new arguments correctly.
2152 * Available since feature `formspec_version_element`.
2153 * See also: [Version History]
2155 ### `size[<W>,<H>,<fixed_size>]`
2157 * Define the size of the menu in inventory slots
2158 * `fixed_size`: `true`/`false` (optional)
2159 * deprecated: `invsize[<W>,<H>;]`
2161 ### `position[<X>,<Y>]`
2163 * Must be used after `size` element.
2164 * Defines the position on the game window of the formspec's `anchor` point.
2165 * For X and Y, 0.0 and 1.0 represent opposite edges of the game window,
2167 * [0.0, 0.0] sets the position to the top left corner of the game window.
2168 * [1.0, 1.0] sets the position to the bottom right of the game window.
2169 * Defaults to the center of the game window [0.5, 0.5].
2171 ### `anchor[<X>,<Y>]`
2173 * Must be used after both `size` and `position` (if present) elements.
2174 * Defines the location of the anchor point within the formspec.
2175 * For X and Y, 0.0 and 1.0 represent opposite edges of the formspec,
2177 * [0.0, 1.0] sets the anchor to the bottom left corner of the formspec.
2178 * [1.0, 0.0] sets the anchor to the top right of the formspec.
2179 * Defaults to the center of the formspec [0.5, 0.5].
2181 * `position` and `anchor` elements need suitable values to avoid a formspec
2182 extending off the game window due to particular game window sizes.
2186 * Must be used after the `size`, `position`, and `anchor` elements (if present).
2187 * Disables player:set_formspec_prepend() from applying to this formspec.
2189 ### `real_coordinates[<bool>]`
2191 * INFORMATION: Enable it automatically using `formspec_version` version 2 or newer.
2192 * When set to true, all following formspec elements will use the new coordinate system.
2193 * If used immediately after `size`, `position`, `anchor`, and `no_prepend` elements
2194 (if present), the form size will use the new coordinate system.
2195 * **Note**: Formspec prepends are not affected by the coordinates in the main form.
2196 They must enable it explicitly.
2197 * For information on converting forms to the new coordinate system, see `Migrating
2198 to Real Coordinates`.
2200 ### `container[<X>,<Y>]`
2202 * Start of a container block, moves all physical elements in the container by
2204 * Must have matching `container_end`
2205 * Containers can be nested, in which case the offsets are added
2206 (child containers are relative to parent containers)
2208 ### `container_end[]`
2210 * End of a container, following elements are no longer relative to this
2213 ### `scroll_container[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<scrollbar name>;<orientation>;<scroll factor>]`
2215 * Start of a scroll_container block. All contained elements will ...
2216 * take the scroll_container coordinate as position origin,
2217 * be additionally moved by the current value of the scrollbar with the name
2218 `scrollbar name` times `scroll factor` along the orientation `orientation` and
2219 * be clipped to the rectangle defined by `X`, `Y`, `W` and `H`.
2220 * `orientation`: possible values are `vertical` and `horizontal`.
2221 * `scroll factor`: optional, defaults to `0.1`.
2222 * Nesting is possible.
2223 * Some elements might work a little different if they are in a scroll_container.
2224 * Note: If you want the scroll_container to actually work, you also need to add a
2225 scrollbar element with the specified name. Furthermore, it is highly recommended
2226 to use a scrollbaroptions element on this scrollbar.
2228 ### `scroll_container_end[]`
2230 * End of a scroll_container, following elements are no longer bound to this
2233 ### `list[<inventory location>;<list name>;<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;]`
2235 * Show an inventory list if it has been sent to the client. Nothing will
2236 be shown if the inventory list is of size 0.
2237 * **Note**: With the new coordinate system, the spacing between inventory
2238 slots is one-fourth the size of an inventory slot by default. Also see
2239 [Styling Formspecs] for changing the size of slots and spacing.
2241 ### `list[<inventory location>;<list name>;<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<starting item index>]`
2243 * Show an inventory list if it has been sent to the client. Nothing will
2244 be shown if the inventory list is of size 0.
2245 * **Note**: With the new coordinate system, the spacing between inventory
2246 slots is one-fourth the size of an inventory slot.
2248 ### `listring[<inventory location>;<list name>]`
2250 * Allows to create a ring of inventory lists
2251 * Shift-clicking on items in one element of the ring
2252 will send them to the next inventory list inside the ring
2253 * The first occurrence of an element inside the ring will
2254 determine the inventory where items will be sent to
2258 * Shorthand for doing `listring[<inventory location>;<list name>]`
2259 for the last two inventory lists added by list[...]
2261 ### `listcolors[<slot_bg_normal>;<slot_bg_hover>]`
2263 * Sets background color of slots as `ColorString`
2264 * Sets background color of slots on mouse hovering
2266 ### `listcolors[<slot_bg_normal>;<slot_bg_hover>;<slot_border>]`
2268 * Sets background color of slots as `ColorString`
2269 * Sets background color of slots on mouse hovering
2270 * Sets color of slots border
2272 ### `listcolors[<slot_bg_normal>;<slot_bg_hover>;<slot_border>;<tooltip_bgcolor>;<tooltip_fontcolor>]`
2274 * Sets background color of slots as `ColorString`
2275 * Sets background color of slots on mouse hovering
2276 * Sets color of slots border
2277 * Sets default background color of tooltips
2278 * Sets default font color of tooltips
2280 ### `tooltip[<gui_element_name>;<tooltip_text>;<bgcolor>;<fontcolor>]`
2282 * Adds tooltip for an element
2283 * `bgcolor` tooltip background color as `ColorString` (optional)
2284 * `fontcolor` tooltip font color as `ColorString` (optional)
2286 ### `tooltip[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<tooltip_text>;<bgcolor>;<fontcolor>]`
2288 * Adds tooltip for an area. Other tooltips will take priority when present.
2289 * `bgcolor` tooltip background color as `ColorString` (optional)
2290 * `fontcolor` tooltip font color as `ColorString` (optional)
2292 ### `image[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>]`
2296 ### `animated_image[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<texture name>;<frame count>;<frame duration>;<frame start>]`
2298 * Show an animated image. The image is drawn like a "vertical_frames" tile
2299 animation (See [Tile animation definition]), but uses a frame count/duration
2301 * `name`: Element name to send when an event occurs. The event value is the index of the current frame.
2302 * `texture name`: The image to use.
2303 * `frame count`: The number of frames animating the image.
2304 * `frame duration`: Milliseconds between each frame. `0` means the frames don't advance.
2305 * `frame start` (Optional): The index of the frame to start on. Default `1`.
2307 ### `model[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<mesh>;<textures>;<rotation X,Y>;<continuous>;<mouse control>;<frame loop range>;<animation speed>]`
2309 * Show a mesh model.
2310 * `name`: Element name that can be used for styling
2311 * `mesh`: The mesh model to use.
2312 * `textures`: The mesh textures to use according to the mesh materials.
2313 Texture names must be separated by commas.
2314 * `rotation {X,Y}` (Optional): Initial rotation of the camera.
2315 The axes are euler angles in degrees.
2316 * `continuous` (Optional): Whether the rotation is continuous. Default `false`.
2317 * `mouse control` (Optional): Whether the model can be controlled with the mouse. Default `true`.
2318 * `frame loop range` (Optional): Range of the animation frames.
2319 * Defaults to the full range of all available frames.
2320 * Syntax: `<begin>,<end>`
2321 * `animation speed` (Optional): Sets the animation speed. Default 0 FPS.
2323 ### `item_image[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<item name>]`
2325 * Show an inventory image of registered item/node
2327 ### `bgcolor[<bgcolor>;<fullscreen>;<fbgcolor>]`
2329 * Sets background color of formspec.
2330 * `bgcolor` and `fbgcolor` (optional) are `ColorString`s, they define the color
2331 of the non-fullscreen and the fullscreen background.
2332 * `fullscreen` (optional) can be one of the following:
2333 * `false`: Only the non-fullscreen background color is drawn. (default)
2334 * `true`: Only the fullscreen background color is drawn.
2335 * `both`: The non-fullscreen and the fullscreen background color are drawn.
2336 * `neither`: No background color is drawn.
2337 * Note: Leave a parameter empty to not modify the value.
2338 * Note: `fbgcolor`, leaving parameters empty and values for `fullscreen` that
2339 are not bools are only available since formspec version 3.
2341 ### `background[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>]`
2343 * Example for formspec 8x4 in 16x resolution: image shall be sized
2344 8 times 16px times 4 times 16px.
2346 ### `background[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>;<auto_clip>]`
2348 * Example for formspec 8x4 in 16x resolution:
2349 image shall be sized 8 times 16px times 4 times 16px
2350 * If `auto_clip` is `true`, the background is clipped to the formspec size
2351 (`x` and `y` are used as offset values, `w` and `h` are ignored)
2353 ### `background9[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>;<auto_clip>;<middle>]`
2355 * 9-sliced background. See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/9-slice_scaling
2356 * Middle is a rect which defines the middle of the 9-slice.
2357 * `x` - The middle will be x pixels from all sides.
2358 * `x,y` - The middle will be x pixels from the horizontal and y from the vertical.
2359 * `x,y,x2,y2` - The middle will start at x,y, and end at x2, y2. Negative x2 and y2 values
2360 will be added to the width and height of the texture, allowing it to be used as the
2361 distance from the far end.
2362 * All numbers in middle are integers.
2363 * Example for formspec 8x4 in 16x resolution:
2364 image shall be sized 8 times 16px times 4 times 16px
2365 * If `auto_clip` is `true`, the background is clipped to the formspec size
2366 (`x` and `y` are used as offset values, `w` and `h` are ignored)
2367 * Available since formspec version 2
2369 ### `pwdfield[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<label>]`
2371 * Textual password style field; will be sent to server when a button is clicked
2372 * When enter is pressed in field, fields.key_enter_field will be sent with the
2374 * With the old coordinate system, fields are a set height, but will be vertically
2375 centred on `H`. With the new coordinate system, `H` will modify the height.
2376 * `name` is the name of the field as returned in fields to `on_receive_fields`
2377 * `label`, if not blank, will be text printed on the top left above the field
2378 * See `field_close_on_enter` to stop enter closing the formspec
2380 ### `field[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<label>;<default>]`
2382 * Textual field; will be sent to server when a button is clicked
2383 * When enter is pressed in field, `fields.key_enter_field` will be sent with
2384 the name of this field.
2385 * With the old coordinate system, fields are a set height, but will be vertically
2386 centred on `H`. With the new coordinate system, `H` will modify the height.
2387 * `name` is the name of the field as returned in fields to `on_receive_fields`
2388 * `label`, if not blank, will be text printed on the top left above the field
2389 * `default` is the default value of the field
2390 * `default` may contain variable references such as `${text}` which
2391 will fill the value from the metadata value `text`
2392 * **Note**: no extra text or more than a single variable is supported ATM.
2393 * See `field_close_on_enter` to stop enter closing the formspec
2395 ### `field[<name>;<label>;<default>]`
2397 * As above, but without position/size units
2398 * When enter is pressed in field, `fields.key_enter_field` will be sent with
2399 the name of this field.
2400 * Special field for creating simple forms, such as sign text input
2401 * Must be used without a `size[]` element
2402 * A "Proceed" button will be added automatically
2403 * See `field_close_on_enter` to stop enter closing the formspec
2405 ### `field_close_on_enter[<name>;<close_on_enter>]`
2407 * <name> is the name of the field
2408 * if <close_on_enter> is false, pressing enter in the field will submit the
2409 form but not close it.
2410 * defaults to true when not specified (ie: no tag for a field)
2412 ### `textarea[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<label>;<default>]`
2414 * Same as fields above, but with multi-line input
2415 * If the text overflows, a vertical scrollbar is added.
2416 * If the name is empty, the textarea is read-only and
2417 the background is not shown, which corresponds to a multi-line label.
2419 ### `label[<X>,<Y>;<label>]`
2421 * The label formspec element displays the text set in `label`
2422 at the specified position.
2423 * **Note**: If the new coordinate system is enabled, labels are
2424 positioned from the center of the text, not the top.
2425 * The text is displayed directly without automatic line breaking,
2426 so label should not be used for big text chunks. Newlines can be
2427 used to make labels multiline.
2428 * **Note**: With the new coordinate system, newlines are spaced with
2429 half a coordinate. With the old system, newlines are spaced 2/5 of
2432 ### `hypertext[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<text>]`
2433 * Displays a static formatted text with hyperlinks.
2434 * **Note**: This element is currently unstable and subject to change.
2435 * `x`, `y`, `w` and `h` work as per field
2436 * `name` is the name of the field as returned in fields to `on_receive_fields` in case of action in text.
2437 * `text` is the formatted text using `Markup Language` described below.
2439 ### `vertlabel[<X>,<Y>;<label>]`
2440 * Textual label drawn vertically
2441 * `label` is the text on the label
2442 * **Note**: If the new coordinate system is enabled, vertlabels are
2443 positioned from the center of the text, not the left.
2445 ### `button[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<label>]`
2447 * Clickable button. When clicked, fields will be sent.
2448 * With the old coordinate system, buttons are a set height, but will be vertically
2449 centred on `H`. With the new coordinate system, `H` will modify the height.
2450 * `label` is the text on the button
2452 ### `image_button[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>;<name>;<label>]`
2454 * `texture name` is the filename of an image
2455 * **Note**: Height is supported on both the old and new coordinate systems
2458 ### `image_button[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>;<name>;<label>;<noclip>;<drawborder>;<pressed texture name>]`
2460 * `texture name` is the filename of an image
2461 * `noclip=true` means the image button doesn't need to be within specified
2463 * `drawborder`: draw button border or not
2464 * `pressed texture name` is the filename of an image on pressed state
2466 ### `item_image_button[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<item name>;<name>;<label>]`
2468 * `item name` is the registered name of an item/node
2469 * The item description will be used as the tooltip. This can be overridden with
2472 ### `button_exit[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<label>]`
2474 * When clicked, fields will be sent and the form will quit.
2475 * Same as `button` in all other respects.
2477 ### `image_button_exit[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<texture name>;<name>;<label>]`
2479 * When clicked, fields will be sent and the form will quit.
2480 * Same as `image_button` in all other respects.
2482 ### `textlist[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<listelem 1>,<listelem 2>,...,<listelem n>]`
2484 * Scrollable item list showing arbitrary text elements
2485 * `name` fieldname sent to server on doubleclick value is current selected
2487 * `listelements` can be prepended by #color in hexadecimal format RRGGBB
2489 * if you want a listelement to start with "#" write "##".
2491 ### `textlist[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<listelem 1>,<listelem 2>,...,<listelem n>;<selected idx>;<transparent>]`
2493 * Scrollable itemlist showing arbitrary text elements
2494 * `name` fieldname sent to server on doubleclick value is current selected
2496 * `listelements` can be prepended by #RRGGBB (only) in hexadecimal format
2497 * if you want a listelement to start with "#" write "##"
2498 * Index to be selected within textlist
2499 * `true`/`false`: draw transparent background
2500 * See also `minetest.explode_textlist_event`
2501 (main menu: `core.explode_textlist_event`).
2503 ### `tabheader[<X>,<Y>;<name>;<caption 1>,<caption 2>,...,<caption n>;<current_tab>;<transparent>;<draw_border>]`
2505 * Show a tab**header** at specific position (ignores formsize)
2506 * `X` and `Y`: position of the tabheader
2507 * *Note*: Width and height are automatically chosen with this syntax
2508 * `name` fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2509 * `caption 1`...: name shown on top of tab
2510 * `current_tab`: index of selected tab 1...
2511 * `transparent` (optional): if true, tabs are semi-transparent
2512 * `draw_border` (optional): if true, draw a thin line at tab base
2514 ### `tabheader[<X>,<Y>;<H>;<name>;<caption 1>,<caption 2>,...,<caption n>;<current_tab>;<transparent>;<draw_border>]`
2516 * Show a tab**header** at specific position (ignores formsize)
2517 * **Important note**: This syntax for tabheaders can only be used with the
2518 new coordinate system.
2519 * `X` and `Y`: position of the tabheader
2520 * `H`: height of the tabheader. Width is automatically determined with this syntax.
2521 * `name` fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2522 * `caption 1`...: name shown on top of tab
2523 * `current_tab`: index of selected tab 1...
2524 * `transparent` (optional): show transparent
2525 * `draw_border` (optional): draw border
2527 ### `tabheader[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<caption 1>,<caption 2>,...,<caption n>;<current_tab>;<transparent>;<draw_border>]`
2529 * Show a tab**header** at specific position (ignores formsize)
2530 * **Important note**: This syntax for tabheaders can only be used with the
2531 new coordinate system.
2532 * `X` and `Y`: position of the tabheader
2533 * `W` and `H`: width and height of the tabheader
2534 * `name` fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2535 * `caption 1`...: name shown on top of tab
2536 * `current_tab`: index of selected tab 1...
2537 * `transparent` (optional): show transparent
2538 * `draw_border` (optional): draw border
2540 ### `box[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<color>]`
2542 * Simple colored box
2543 * `color` is color specified as a `ColorString`.
2544 If the alpha component is left blank, the box will be semitransparent.
2545 If the color is not specified, the box will use the options specified by
2546 its style. If the color is specified, all styling options will be ignored.
2548 ### `dropdown[<X>,<Y>;<W>;<name>;<item 1>,<item 2>, ...,<item n>;<selected idx>;<index event>]`
2550 * Show a dropdown field
2551 * **Important note**: There are two different operation modes:
2552 1. handle directly on change (only changed dropdown is submitted)
2553 2. read the value on pressing a button (all dropdown values are available)
2554 * `X` and `Y`: position of the dropdown
2555 * `W`: width of the dropdown. Height is automatically chosen with this syntax.
2556 * Fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2557 * Items to be shown in dropdown
2558 * Index of currently selected dropdown item
2559 * `index event` (optional, allowed parameter since formspec version 4): Specifies the
2560 event field value for selected items.
2561 * `true`: Selected item index
2562 * `false` (default): Selected item value
2564 ### `dropdown[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<item 1>,<item 2>, ...,<item n>;<selected idx>;<index event>]`
2566 * Show a dropdown field
2567 * **Important note**: This syntax for dropdowns can only be used with the
2568 new coordinate system.
2569 * **Important note**: There are two different operation modes:
2570 1. handle directly on change (only changed dropdown is submitted)
2571 2. read the value on pressing a button (all dropdown values are available)
2572 * `X` and `Y`: position of the dropdown
2573 * `W` and `H`: width and height of the dropdown
2574 * Fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2575 * Items to be shown in dropdown
2576 * Index of currently selected dropdown item
2577 * `index event` (optional, allowed parameter since formspec version 4): Specifies the
2578 event field value for selected items.
2579 * `true`: Selected item index
2580 * `false` (default): Selected item value
2582 ### `checkbox[<X>,<Y>;<name>;<label>;<selected>]`
2585 * `name` fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2586 * `label` to be shown left of checkbox
2587 * `selected` (optional): `true`/`false`
2588 * **Note**: If the new coordinate system is enabled, checkboxes are
2589 positioned from the center of the checkbox, not the top.
2591 ### `scrollbar[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<orientation>;<name>;<value>]`
2593 * Show a scrollbar using options defined by the previous `scrollbaroptions[]`
2594 * There are two ways to use it:
2595 1. handle the changed event (only changed scrollbar is available)
2596 2. read the value on pressing a button (all scrollbars are available)
2597 * `orientation`: `vertical`/`horizontal`. Default horizontal.
2598 * Fieldname data is transferred to Lua
2599 * Value of this trackbar is set to (`0`-`1000`) by default
2600 * See also `minetest.explode_scrollbar_event`
2601 (main menu: `core.explode_scrollbar_event`).
2603 ### `scrollbaroptions[opt1;opt2;...]`
2604 * Sets options for all following `scrollbar[]` elements
2606 * Sets scrollbar minimum value, defaults to `0`.
2608 * Sets scrollbar maximum value, defaults to `1000`.
2609 If the max is equal to the min, the scrollbar will be disabled.
2611 * Sets scrollbar step value when the arrows are clicked or the mouse wheel is
2613 * If this is set to a negative number, the value will be reset to `10`.
2615 * Sets scrollbar step value used by page up and page down.
2616 * If this is set to a negative number, the value will be reset to `100`.
2618 * Sets size of the thumb on the scrollbar. Size is calculated in the number of
2619 units the thumb spans out of the range of the scrollbar values.
2620 * Example: If a scrollbar has a `min` of 1 and a `max` of 100, a thumbsize of 10
2621 would span a tenth of the scrollbar space.
2622 * If this is set to zero or less, the value will be reset to `1`.
2623 * `arrows=<show/hide/default>`
2624 * Whether to show the arrow buttons on the scrollbar. `default` hides the arrows
2625 when the scrollbar gets too small, but shows them otherwise.
2627 ### `table[<X>,<Y>;<W>,<H>;<name>;<cell 1>,<cell 2>,...,<cell n>;<selected idx>]`
2629 * Show scrollable table using options defined by the previous `tableoptions[]`
2630 * Displays cells as defined by the previous `tablecolumns[]`
2631 * `name`: fieldname sent to server on row select or doubleclick
2632 * `cell 1`...`cell n`: cell contents given in row-major order
2633 * `selected idx`: index of row to be selected within table (first row = `1`)
2634 * See also `minetest.explode_table_event`
2635 (main menu: `core.explode_table_event`).
2637 ### `tableoptions[<opt 1>;<opt 2>;...]`
2639 * Sets options for `table[]`
2641 * default text color (`ColorString`), defaults to `#FFFFFF`
2642 * `background=#RRGGBB`
2643 * table background color (`ColorString`), defaults to `#000000`
2644 * `border=<true/false>`
2645 * should the table be drawn with a border? (default: `true`)
2646 * `highlight=#RRGGBB`
2647 * highlight background color (`ColorString`), defaults to `#466432`
2648 * `highlight_text=#RRGGBB`
2649 * highlight text color (`ColorString`), defaults to `#FFFFFF`
2650 * `opendepth=<value>`
2651 * all subtrees up to `depth < value` are open (default value = `0`)
2652 * only useful when there is a column of type "tree"
2654 ### `tablecolumns[<type 1>,<opt 1a>,<opt 1b>,...;<type 2>,<opt 2a>,<opt 2b>;...]`
2656 * Sets columns for `table[]`
2657 * Types: `text`, `image`, `color`, `indent`, `tree`
2658 * `text`: show cell contents as text
2659 * `image`: cell contents are an image index, use column options to define
2661 * `color`: cell contents are a ColorString and define color of following
2663 * `indent`: cell contents are a number and define indentation of following
2665 * `tree`: same as indent, but user can open and close subtrees
2669 * for `text` and `image`: content alignment within cells.
2670 Available values: `left` (default), `center`, `right`, `inline`
2672 * for `text` and `image`: minimum width in em (default: `0`)
2673 * for `indent` and `tree`: indent width in em (default: `1.5`)
2674 * `padding=<value>`: padding left of the column, in em (default `0.5`).
2675 Exception: defaults to 0 for indent columns
2676 * `tooltip=<value>`: tooltip text (default: empty)
2677 * `image` column options:
2678 * `0=<value>` sets image for image index 0
2679 * `1=<value>` sets image for image index 1
2680 * `2=<value>` sets image for image index 2
2681 * and so on; defined indices need not be contiguous empty or
2682 non-numeric cells are treated as `0`.
2683 * `color` column options:
2684 * `span=<value>`: number of following columns to affect
2685 (default: infinite).
2687 ### `style[<selector 1>,<selector 2>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]`
2689 * Set the style for the element(s) matching `selector` by name.
2690 * `selector` can be one of:
2691 * `<name>` - An element name. Includes `*`, which represents every element.
2692 * `<name>:<state>` - An element name, a colon, and one or more states.
2693 * `state` is a list of states separated by the `+` character.
2694 * If a state is provided, the style will only take effect when the element is in that state.
2695 * All provided states must be active for the style to apply.
2696 * Note: this **must** be before the element is defined.
2697 * See [Styling Formspecs].
2700 ### `style_type[<selector 1>,<selector 2>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]`
2702 * Set the style for the element(s) matching `selector` by type.
2703 * `selector` can be one of:
2704 * `<type>` - An element type. Includes `*`, which represents every element.
2705 * `<type>:<state>` - An element type, a colon, and one or more states.
2706 * `state` is a list of states separated by the `+` character.
2707 * If a state is provided, the style will only take effect when the element is in that state.
2708 * All provided states must be active for the style to apply.
2709 * See [Styling Formspecs].
2711 ### `set_focus[<name>;<force>]`
2713 * Sets the focus to the element with the same `name` parameter.
2714 * **Note**: This element must be placed before the element it focuses.
2715 * `force` (optional, default `false`): By default, focus is not applied for
2716 re-sent formspecs with the same name so that player-set focus is kept.
2717 `true` sets the focus to the specified element for every sent formspec.
2718 * The following elements have the ability to be focused:
2733 Migrating to Real Coordinates
2734 -----------------------------
2736 In the old system, positions included padding and spacing. Padding is a gap between
2737 the formspec window edges and content, and spacing is the gaps between items. For
2738 example, two `1x1` elements at `0,0` and `1,1` would have a spacing of `5/4` between them,
2739 and a padding of `3/8` from the formspec edge. It may be easiest to recreate old layouts
2740 in the new coordinate system from scratch.
2742 To recreate an old layout with padding, you'll need to pass the positions and sizes
2743 through the following formula to re-introduce padding:
2746 pos = (oldpos + 1)*spacing + padding
2752 You'll need to change the `size[]` tag like this:
2755 size = (oldsize-1)*spacing + padding*2 + 1
2758 A few elements had random offsets in the old system. Here is a table which shows these
2759 offsets when migrating:
2761 | Element | Position | Size | Notes
2762 |---------|------------|---------|-------
2763 | box | +0.3, +0.1 | 0, -0.4 |
2764 | button | | | Buttons now support height, so set h = 2 * 15/13 * 0.35, and reposition if h ~= 15/13 * 0.35 before
2765 | list | | | Spacing is now 0.25 for both directions, meaning lists will be taller in height
2766 | label | 0, +0.3 | | The first line of text is now positioned centered exactly at the position specified
2771 Formspec elements can be themed using the style elements:
2773 style[<name 1>,<name 2>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]
2774 style[<name 1>:<state>,<name 2>:<state>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]
2775 style_type[<type 1>,<type 2>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]
2776 style_type[<type 1>:<state>,<type 2>:<state>,...;<prop1>;<prop2>;...]
2780 property_name=property_value
2784 style_type[button;bgcolor=#006699]
2785 style[world_delete;bgcolor=red;textcolor=yellow]
2786 button[4,3.95;2.6,1;world_delete;Delete]
2788 A name/type can optionally be a comma separated list of names/types, like so:
2790 world_delete,world_create,world_configure
2793 A `*` type can be used to select every element in the formspec.
2795 Any name/type in the list can also be accompanied by a `+`-separated list of states, like so:
2797 world_delete:hovered+pressed
2800 States allow you to apply styles in response to changes in the element, instead of applying at all times.
2802 Setting a property to nothing will reset it to the default value. For example:
2804 style_type[button;bgimg=button.png;bgimg_pressed=button_pressed.png;border=false]
2805 style[btn_exit;bgimg=;bgimg_pressed=;border=;bgcolor=red]
2808 ### Supported Element Types
2810 Some types may inherit styles from parent types.
2812 * animated_image, inherits from image
2815 * button_exit, inherits from button
2825 * pwdfield, inherits from field
2831 * vertlabel, inherits from label
2834 ### Valid Properties
2837 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2839 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2840 * Defaults to false in formspec_version version 3 or higher
2841 * **Note**: `colors`, `bordercolors`, and `borderwidths` accept multiple input types:
2842 * Single value (e.g. `#FF0`): All corners/borders.
2843 * Two values (e.g. `red,#FFAAFF`): top-left and bottom-right,top-right and bottom-left/
2844 top and bottom,left and right.
2845 * Four values (e.g. `blue,#A0F,green,#FFFA`): top-left/top and rotates clockwise.
2846 * These work similarly to CSS borders.
2847 * colors - `ColorString`. Sets the color(s) of the box corners. Default `black`.
2848 * bordercolors - `ColorString`. Sets the color(s) of the borders. Default `black`.
2849 * borderwidths - Integer. Sets the width(s) of the borders in pixels. If the width is
2850 negative, the border will extend inside the box, whereas positive extends outside
2851 the box. A width of zero results in no border; this is default.
2852 * button, button_exit, image_button, item_image_button
2853 * alpha - boolean, whether to draw alpha in bgimg. Default true.
2854 * bgcolor - color, sets button tint.
2855 * bgcolor_hovered - color when hovered. Defaults to a lighter bgcolor when not provided.
2856 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2857 * bgcolor_pressed - color when pressed. Defaults to a darker bgcolor when not provided.
2858 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2859 * bgimg - standard background image. Defaults to none.
2860 * bgimg_hovered - background image when hovered. Defaults to bgimg when not provided.
2861 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2862 * bgimg_middle - Makes the bgimg textures render in 9-sliced mode and defines the middle rect.
2863 See background9[] documentation for more details. This property also pads the
2864 button's content when set.
2865 * bgimg_pressed - background image when pressed. Defaults to bgimg when not provided.
2866 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2867 * font - Sets font type. This is a comma separated list of options. Valid options:
2868 * Main font type options. These cannot be combined with each other:
2869 * `normal`: Default font
2870 * `mono`: Monospaced font
2871 * Font modification options. If used without a main font type, `normal` is used:
2872 * `bold`: Makes font bold.
2873 * `italic`: Makes font italic.
2875 * font_size - Sets font size. Default is user-set. Can have multiple values:
2876 * `<number>`: Sets absolute font size to `number`.
2877 * `+<number>`/`-<number>`: Offsets default font size by `number` points.
2878 * `*<number>`: Multiplies default font size by `number`, similar to CSS `em`.
2879 * border - boolean, draw border. Set to false to hide the bevelled button pane. Default true.
2880 * content_offset - 2d vector, shifts the position of the button's content without resizing it.
2881 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2882 * padding - rect, adds space between the edges of the button and the content. This value is
2883 relative to bgimg_middle.
2884 * sound - a sound to be played when triggered.
2885 * textcolor - color, default white.
2887 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2888 * sound - a sound to be played when triggered.
2890 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2891 * sound - a sound to be played when the entry is changed.
2892 * field, pwdfield, textarea
2893 * border - set to false to hide the textbox background and border. Default true.
2894 * font - Sets font type. See button `font` property for more information.
2895 * font_size - Sets font size. See button `font_size` property for more information.
2896 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2897 * textcolor - color. Default white.
2899 * bgcolor - color, sets background color.
2900 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2901 * Default to false in formspec_version version 3 or higher
2903 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2904 * Default to false in formspec_version version 3 or higher
2906 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds. Default to false.
2908 * font - Sets font type. See button `font` property for more information.
2909 * font_size - Sets font size. See button `font_size` property for more information.
2910 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2912 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2913 * size - 2d vector, sets the size of inventory slots in coordinates.
2914 * spacing - 2d vector, sets the space between inventory slots in coordinates.
2915 * image_button (additional properties)
2916 * fgimg - standard image. Defaults to none.
2917 * fgimg_hovered - image when hovered. Defaults to fgimg when not provided.
2918 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2919 * fgimg_pressed - image when pressed. Defaults to fgimg when not provided.
2920 * This is deprecated, use states instead.
2921 * NOTE: The parameters of any given image_button will take precedence over fgimg/fgimg_pressed
2922 * sound - a sound to be played when triggered.
2924 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2926 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2927 * sound - a sound to be played when a different tab is selected.
2928 * textcolor - color. Default white.
2930 * font - Sets font type. See button `font` property for more information.
2931 * font_size - Sets font size. See button `font_size` property for more information.
2932 * noclip - boolean, set to true to allow the element to exceed formspec bounds.
2937 * default - Equivalent to providing no states
2938 * button, button_exit, image_button, item_image_button
2939 * hovered - Active when the mouse is hovering over the element
2940 * pressed - Active when the button is pressed
2945 Markup language used in `hypertext[]` elements uses tags that look like HTML tags.
2946 The markup language is currently unstable and subject to change. Use with caution.
2947 Some tags can enclose text, they open with `<tagname>` and close with `</tagname>`.
2948 Tags can have attributes, in that case, attributes are in the opening tag in
2949 form of a key/value separated with equal signs. Attribute values should not be quoted.
2951 These are the technically basic tags but see below for usual tags. Base tags are:
2953 `<style color=... font=... size=...>...</style>`
2955 Changes the style of the text.
2957 * `color`: Text color. Given color is a `colorspec`.
2958 * `size`: Text size.
2959 * `font`: Text font (`mono` or `normal`).
2961 `<global background=... margin=... valign=... color=... hovercolor=... size=... font=... halign=... >`
2966 * `background`: Text background, a `colorspec` or `none`.
2967 * `margin`: Page margins in pixel.
2968 * `valign`: Text vertical alignment (`top`, `middle`, `bottom`).
2970 Inheriting styles (affects child elements):
2971 * `color`: Default text color. Given color is a `colorspec`.
2972 * `hovercolor`: Color of <action> tags when mouse is over.
2973 * `size`: Default text size.
2974 * `font`: Default text font (`mono` or `normal`).
2975 * `halign`: Default text horizontal alignment (`left`, `right`, `center`, `justify`).
2977 This tag needs to be placed only once as it changes the global settings of the
2978 text. Anyway, if several tags are placed, each changed will be made in the order
2981 `<tag name=... color=... hovercolor=... font=... size=...>`
2983 Defines or redefines tag style. This can be used to define new tags.
2984 * `name`: Name of the tag to define or change.
2985 * `color`: Text color. Given color is a `colorspec`.
2986 * `hovercolor`: Text color when element hovered (only for `action` tags). Given color is a `colorspec`.
2987 * `size`: Text size.
2988 * `font`: Text font (`mono` or `normal`).
2990 Following tags are the usual tags for text layout. They are defined by default.
2991 Other tags can be added using `<tag ...>` tag.
2993 `<normal>...</normal>`: Normal size text
2995 `<big>...</big>`: Big text
2997 `<bigger>...</bigger>`: Bigger text
2999 `<center>...</center>`: Centered text
3001 `<left>...</left>`: Left-aligned text
3003 `<right>...</right>`: Right-aligned text
3005 `<justify>...</justify>`: Justified text
3007 `<mono>...</mono>`: Monospaced font
3009 `<b>...</b>`, `<i>...</i>`, `<u>...</u>`: Bold, italic, underline styles.
3011 `<action name=...>...</action>`
3013 Make that text a clickable text triggering an action.
3015 * `name`: Name of the action (mandatory).
3017 When clicked, the formspec is send to the server. The value of the text field
3018 sent to `on_player_receive_fields` will be "action:" concatenated to the action
3021 `<img name=... float=... width=... height=...>`
3023 Draws an image which is present in the client media cache.
3025 * `name`: Name of the texture (mandatory).
3026 * `float`: If present, makes the image floating (`left` or `right`).
3027 * `width`: Force image width instead of taking texture width.
3028 * `height`: Force image height instead of taking texture height.
3030 If only width or height given, texture aspect is kept.
3032 `<item name=... float=... width=... height=... rotate=...>`
3034 Draws an item image.
3036 * `name`: Item string of the item to draw (mandatory).
3037 * `float`: If present, makes the image floating (`left` or `right`).
3038 * `width`: Item image width.
3039 * `height`: Item image height.
3040 * `rotate`: Rotate item image if set to `yes` or `X,Y,Z`. X, Y and Z being
3041 rotation speeds in percent of standard speed (-1000 to 1000). Works only if
3042 `inventory_items_animations` is set to true.
3043 * `angle`: Angle in which the item image is shown. Value has `X,Y,Z` form.
3044 X, Y and Z being angles around each three axes. Works only if
3045 `inventory_items_animations` is set to true.
3053 * `"context"`: Selected node metadata (deprecated: `"current_name"`)
3054 * `"current_player"`: Player to whom the menu is shown
3055 * `"player:<name>"`: Any player
3056 * `"nodemeta:<X>,<Y>,<Z>"`: Any node metadata
3057 * `"detached:<name>"`: A detached inventory
3059 Player Inventory lists
3060 ----------------------
3062 * `main`: list containing the default inventory
3063 * `craft`: list containing the craft input
3064 * `craftpreview`: list containing the craft prediction
3065 * `craftresult`: list containing the crafted output
3066 * `hand`: list containing an override for the empty hand
3067 * Is not created automatically, use `InvRef:set_size`
3068 * Is only used to enhance the empty hand's tool capabilities
3076 `#RGB` defines a color in hexadecimal format.
3078 `#RGBA` defines a color in hexadecimal format and alpha channel.
3080 `#RRGGBB` defines a color in hexadecimal format.
3082 `#RRGGBBAA` defines a color in hexadecimal format and alpha channel.
3084 Named colors are also supported and are equivalent to
3085 [CSS Color Module Level 4](http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css-color/#named-colors).
3086 To specify the value of the alpha channel, append `#AA` to the end of the color
3087 name (e.g. `colorname#08`). For named colors the hexadecimal string
3088 representing the alpha value must (always) be two hexadecimal digits.
3093 A ColorSpec specifies a 32-bit color. It can be written in any of the following
3096 * table form: Each element ranging from 0..255 (a, if absent, defaults to 255):
3097 * `colorspec = {a=255, r=0, g=255, b=0}`
3098 * numerical form: The raw integer value of an ARGB8 quad:
3099 * `colorspec = 0xFF00FF00`
3100 * string form: A ColorString (defined above):
3101 * `colorspec = "green"`
3109 Most text can contain escape sequences, that can for example color the text.
3110 There are a few exceptions: tab headers, dropdowns and vertical labels can't.
3111 The following functions provide escape sequences:
3113 * `minetest.get_color_escape_sequence(color)`:
3114 * `color` is a ColorString
3115 * The escape sequence sets the text color to `color`
3116 * `minetest.colorize(color, message)`:
3118 `minetest.get_color_escape_sequence(color) ..
3120 minetest.get_color_escape_sequence("#ffffff")`
3121 * `minetest.get_background_escape_sequence(color)`
3122 * `color` is a ColorString
3123 * The escape sequence sets the background of the whole text element to
3124 `color`. Only defined for item descriptions and tooltips.
3125 * `minetest.strip_foreground_colors(str)`
3126 * Removes foreground colors added by `get_color_escape_sequence`.
3127 * `minetest.strip_background_colors(str)`
3128 * Removes background colors added by `get_background_escape_sequence`.
3129 * `minetest.strip_colors(str)`
3130 * Removes all color escape sequences.
3137 A spatial vector is similar to a position, but instead using
3138 absolute world coordinates, it uses *relative* coordinates, relative to
3139 no particular point.
3141 Internally, it is implemented as a table with the 3 fields
3142 `x`, `y` and `z`. Example: `{x = 0, y = 1, z = 0}`.
3144 For the following functions, `v`, `v1`, `v2` are vectors,
3145 `p1`, `p2` are positions,
3146 `s` is a scalar (a number):
3148 * `vector.new(a[, b, c])`:
3150 * A copy of `a` if `a` is a vector.
3151 * `{x = a, y = b, z = c}`, if all of `a`, `b`, `c` are defined numbers.
3152 * `vector.direction(p1, p2)`:
3153 * Returns a vector of length 1 with direction `p1` to `p2`.
3154 * If `p1` and `p2` are identical, returns `{x = 0, y = 0, z = 0}`.
3155 * `vector.distance(p1, p2)`:
3156 * Returns zero or a positive number, the distance between `p1` and `p2`.
3157 * `vector.length(v)`:
3158 * Returns zero or a positive number, the length of vector `v`.
3159 * `vector.normalize(v)`:
3160 * Returns a vector of length 1 with direction of vector `v`.
3161 * If `v` has zero length, returns `{x = 0, y = 0, z = 0}`.
3162 * `vector.floor(v)`:
3163 * Returns a vector, each dimension rounded down.
3164 * `vector.round(v)`:
3165 * Returns a vector, each dimension rounded to nearest integer.
3166 * `vector.apply(v, func)`:
3167 * Returns a vector where the function `func` has been applied to each
3169 * `vector.equals(v1, v2)`:
3170 * Returns a boolean, `true` if the vectors are identical.
3171 * `vector.sort(v1, v2)`:
3172 * Returns in order minp, maxp vectors of the cuboid defined by `v1`, `v2`.
3173 * `vector.angle(v1, v2)`:
3174 * Returns the angle between `v1` and `v2` in radians.
3175 * `vector.dot(v1, v2)`:
3176 * Returns the dot product of `v1` and `v2`.
3177 * `vector.cross(v1, v2)`:
3178 * Returns the cross product of `v1` and `v2`.
3179 * `vector.offset(v, x, y, z)`:
3180 * Returns the sum of the vectors `v` and `{x = x, y = y, z = z}`.
3182 For the following functions `x` can be either a vector or a number:
3184 * `vector.add(v, x)`:
3186 * If `x` is a vector: Returns the sum of `v` and `x`.
3187 * If `x` is a number: Adds `x` to each component of `v`.
3188 * `vector.subtract(v, x)`:
3190 * If `x` is a vector: Returns the difference of `v` subtracted by `x`.
3191 * If `x` is a number: Subtracts `x` from each component of `v`.
3192 * `vector.multiply(v, s)`:
3193 * Returns a scaled vector.
3194 * Deprecated: If `s` is a vector: Returns the Schur product.
3195 * `vector.divide(v, s)`:
3196 * Returns a scaled vector.
3197 * Deprecated: If `s` is a vector: Returns the Schur quotient.
3199 For the following functions `a` is an angle in radians and `r` is a rotation
3200 vector ({x = <pitch>, y = <yaw>, z = <roll>}) where pitch, yaw and roll are
3203 * `vector.rotate(v, r)`:
3204 * Applies the rotation `r` to `v` and returns the result.
3205 * `vector.rotate({x = 0, y = 0, z = 1}, r)` and
3206 `vector.rotate({x = 0, y = 1, z = 0}, r)` return vectors pointing
3207 forward and up relative to an entity's rotation `r`.
3208 * `vector.rotate_around_axis(v1, v2, a)`:
3209 * Returns `v1` rotated around axis `v2` by `a` radians according to
3210 the right hand rule.
3211 * `vector.dir_to_rotation(direction[, up])`:
3212 * Returns a rotation vector for `direction` pointing forward using `up`
3214 * If `up` is omitted, the roll of the returned vector defaults to zero.
3215 * Otherwise `direction` and `up` need to be vectors in a 90 degree angle to each other.
3223 * `dump2(obj, name, dumped)`: returns a string which makes `obj`
3224 human-readable, handles reference loops.
3225 * `obj`: arbitrary variable
3226 * `name`: string, default: `"_"`
3227 * `dumped`: table, default: `{}`
3228 * `dump(obj, dumped)`: returns a string which makes `obj` human-readable
3229 * `obj`: arbitrary variable
3230 * `dumped`: table, default: `{}`
3231 * `math.hypot(x, y)`
3232 * Get the hypotenuse of a triangle with legs x and y.
3233 Useful for distance calculation.
3234 * `math.sign(x, tolerance)`: returns `-1`, `0` or `1`
3235 * Get the sign of a number.
3236 * tolerance: number, default: `0.0`
3237 * If the absolute value of `x` is within the `tolerance` or `x` is NaN,
3239 * `math.factorial(x)`: returns the factorial of `x`
3240 * `string.split(str, separator, include_empty, max_splits, sep_is_pattern)`
3241 * `separator`: string, default: `","`
3242 * `include_empty`: boolean, default: `false`
3243 * `max_splits`: number, if it's negative, splits aren't limited,
3245 * `sep_is_pattern`: boolean, it specifies whether separator is a plain
3246 string or a pattern (regex), default: `false`
3247 * e.g. `"a,b":split","` returns `{"a","b"}`
3248 * `string:trim()`: returns the string without whitespace pre- and suffixes
3249 * e.g. `"\n \t\tfoo bar\t ":trim()` returns `"foo bar"`
3250 * `minetest.wrap_text(str, limit, as_table)`: returns a string or table
3251 * Adds newlines to the string to keep it within the specified character
3253 * Note that the returned lines may be longer than the limit since it only
3254 splits at word borders.
3255 * `limit`: number, maximal amount of characters in one line
3256 * `as_table`: boolean, if set to true, a table of lines instead of a string
3257 is returned, default: `false`
3258 * `minetest.pos_to_string(pos, decimal_places)`: returns string `"(X,Y,Z)"`
3259 * `pos`: table {x=X, y=Y, z=Z}
3260 * Converts the position `pos` to a human-readable, printable string
3261 * `decimal_places`: number, if specified, the x, y and z values of
3262 the position are rounded to the given decimal place.
3263 * `minetest.string_to_pos(string)`: returns a position or `nil`
3264 * Same but in reverse.
3265 * If the string can't be parsed to a position, nothing is returned.
3266 * `minetest.string_to_area("(X1, Y1, Z1) (X2, Y2, Z2)")`: returns two positions
3267 * Converts a string representing an area box into two positions
3268 * `minetest.formspec_escape(string)`: returns a string
3269 * escapes the characters "[", "]", "\", "," and ";", which can not be used
3271 * `minetest.is_yes(arg)`
3272 * returns true if passed 'y', 'yes', 'true' or a number that isn't zero.
3273 * `minetest.is_nan(arg)`
3274 * returns true when the passed number represents NaN.
3275 * `minetest.get_us_time()`
3276 * returns time with microsecond precision. May not return wall time.
3277 * `table.copy(table)`: returns a table
3278 * returns a deep copy of `table`
3279 * `table.indexof(list, val)`: returns the smallest numerical index containing
3280 the value `val` in the table `list`. Non-numerical indices are ignored.
3281 If `val` could not be found, `-1` is returned. `list` must not have
3283 * `table.insert_all(table, other_table)`:
3284 * Appends all values in `other_table` to `table` - uses `#table + 1` to
3286 * `table.key_value_swap(t)`: returns a table with keys and values swapped
3287 * If multiple keys in `t` map to the same value, it is unspecified which
3288 value maps to that key.
3289 * `table.shuffle(table, [from], [to], [random_func])`:
3290 * Shuffles elements `from` to `to` in `table` in place
3291 * `from` defaults to `1`
3292 * `to` defaults to `#table`
3293 * `random_func` defaults to `math.random`. This function receives two
3294 integers as arguments and should return a random integer inclusively
3296 * `minetest.pointed_thing_to_face_pos(placer, pointed_thing)`: returns a
3298 * returns the exact position on the surface of a pointed node
3299 * `minetest.get_dig_params(groups, tool_capabilities)`: Simulates a tool
3301 Returns a table with the following fields:
3302 * `diggable`: `true` if node can be dug, `false` otherwise.
3303 * `time`: Time it would take to dig the node.
3304 * `wear`: How much wear would be added to the tool.
3305 `time` and `wear` are meaningless if node's not diggable
3307 * `groups`: Table of the node groups of the node that would be dug
3308 * `tool_capabilities`: Tool capabilities table of the tool
3309 * `minetest.get_hit_params(groups, tool_capabilities [, time_from_last_punch])`:
3310 Simulates an item that punches an object.
3311 Returns a table with the following fields:
3312 * `hp`: How much damage the punch would cause.
3313 * `wear`: How much wear would be added to the tool.
3315 * `groups`: Damage groups of the object
3316 * `tool_capabilities`: Tool capabilities table of the item
3317 * `time_from_last_punch`: time in seconds since last punch action
3325 Texts can be translated client-side with the help of `minetest.translate` and
3328 Translating a string
3329 --------------------
3331 Two functions are provided to translate strings: `minetest.translate` and
3332 `minetest.get_translator`.
3334 * `minetest.get_translator(textdomain)` is a simple wrapper around
3335 `minetest.translate`, and `minetest.get_translator(textdomain)(str, ...)` is
3336 equivalent to `minetest.translate(textdomain, str, ...)`.
3337 It is intended to be used in the following way, so that it avoids verbose
3338 repetitions of `minetest.translate`:
3340 local S = minetest.get_translator(textdomain)
3343 As an extra commodity, if `textdomain` is nil, it is assumed to be "" instead.
3345 * `minetest.translate(textdomain, str, ...)` translates the string `str` with
3346 the given `textdomain` for disambiguation. The textdomain must match the
3347 textdomain specified in the translation file in order to get the string
3348 translated. This can be used so that a string is translated differently in
3350 It is advised to use the name of the mod as textdomain whenever possible, to
3351 avoid clashes with other mods.
3352 This function must be given a number of arguments equal to the number of
3353 arguments the translated string expects.
3354 Arguments are literal strings -- they will not be translated, so if you want
3355 them to be, they need to come as outputs of `minetest.translate` as well.
3357 For instance, suppose we want to translate "@1 Wool" with "@1" being replaced
3358 by the translation of "Red". We can do the following:
3360 local S = minetest.get_translator()
3361 S("@1 Wool", S("Red"))
3363 This will be displayed as "Red Wool" on old clients and on clients that do
3364 not have localization enabled. However, if we have for instance a translation
3365 file named `wool.fr.tr` containing the following:
3370 this will be displayed as "Laine Rouge" on clients with a French locale.
3372 Operations on translated strings
3373 --------------------------------
3375 The output of `minetest.translate` is a string, with escape sequences adding
3376 additional information to that string so that it can be translated on the
3377 different clients. In particular, you can't expect operations like string.length
3378 to work on them like you would expect them to, or string.gsub to work in the
3379 expected manner. However, string concatenation will still work as expected
3380 (note that you should only use this for things like formspecs; do not translate
3381 sentences by breaking them into parts; arguments should be used instead), and
3382 operations such as `minetest.colorize` which are also concatenation.
3384 Translation file format
3385 -----------------------
3387 A translation file has the suffix `.[lang].tr`, where `[lang]` is the language
3388 it corresponds to. It must be put into the `locale` subdirectory of the mod.
3389 The file should be a text file, with the following format:
3391 * Lines beginning with `# textdomain:` (the space is significant) can be used
3392 to specify the text domain of all following translations in the file.
3393 * All other empty lines or lines beginning with `#` are ignored.
3394 * Other lines should be in the format `original=translated`. Both `original`
3395 and `translated` can contain escape sequences beginning with `@` to insert
3396 arguments, literal `@`, `=` or newline (See [Escapes] below).
3397 There must be no extraneous whitespace around the `=` or at the beginning or
3398 the end of the line.
3403 Strings that need to be translated can contain several escapes, preceded by `@`.
3405 * `@@` acts as a literal `@`.
3406 * `@n`, where `n` is a digit between 1 and 9, is an argument for the translated
3407 string that will be inlined when translated. Due to how translations are
3408 implemented, the original translation string **must** have its arguments in
3409 increasing order, without gaps or repetitions, starting from 1.
3410 * `@=` acts as a literal `=`. It is not required in strings given to
3411 `minetest.translate`, but is in translation files to avoid being confused
3412 with the `=` separating the original from the translation.
3413 * `@\n` (where the `\n` is a literal newline) acts as a literal newline.
3414 As with `@=`, this escape is not required in strings given to
3415 `minetest.translate`, but is in translation files.
3416 * `@n` acts as a literal newline as well.
3418 Server side translations
3419 ------------------------
3421 On some specific cases, server translation could be useful. For example, filter
3422 a list on labels and send results to client. A method is supplied to achieve
3425 `minetest.get_translated_string(lang_code, string)`: Translates `string` using
3426 translations for `lang_code` language. It gives the same result as if the string
3427 was translated by the client.
3429 The `lang_code` to use for a given player can be retrieved from
3430 the table returned by `minetest.get_player_information(name)`.
3432 IMPORTANT: This functionality should only be used for sorting, filtering or similar purposes.
3433 You do not need to use this to get translated strings to show up on the client.
3438 Perlin noise creates a continuously-varying value depending on the input values.
3439 Usually in Minetest the input values are either 2D or 3D co-ordinates in nodes.
3440 The result is used during map generation to create the terrain shape, vary heat
3441 and humidity to distribute biomes, vary the density of decorations or vary the
3444 Structure of perlin noise
3445 -------------------------
3447 An 'octave' is a simple noise generator that outputs a value between -1 and 1.
3448 The smooth wavy noise it generates has a single characteristic scale, almost
3449 like a 'wavelength', so on its own does not create fine detail.
3450 Due to this perlin noise combines several octaves to create variation on
3451 multiple scales. Each additional octave has a smaller 'wavelength' than the
3454 This combination results in noise varying very roughly between -2.0 and 2.0 and
3455 with an average value of 0.0, so `scale` and `offset` are then used to multiply
3456 and offset the noise variation.
3458 The final perlin noise variation is created as follows:
3460 noise = offset + scale * (octave1 +
3461 octave2 * persistence +
3462 octave3 * persistence ^ 2 +
3463 octave4 * persistence ^ 3 +
3469 Noise Parameters are commonly called `NoiseParams`.
3473 After the multiplication by `scale` this is added to the result and is the final
3474 step in creating the noise value.
3475 Can be positive or negative.
3479 Once all octaves have been combined, the result is multiplied by this.
3480 Can be positive or negative.
3484 For octave1, this is roughly the change of input value needed for a very large
3485 variation in the noise value generated by octave1. It is almost like a
3486 'wavelength' for the wavy noise variation.
3487 Each additional octave has a 'wavelength' that is smaller than the previous
3488 octave, to create finer detail. `spread` will therefore roughly be the typical
3489 size of the largest structures in the final noise variation.
3491 `spread` is a vector with values for x, y, z to allow the noise variation to be
3492 stretched or compressed in the desired axes.
3493 Values are positive numbers.
3497 This is a whole number that determines the entire pattern of the noise
3498 variation. Altering it enables different noise patterns to be created.
3499 With other parameters equal, different seeds produce different noise patterns
3500 and identical seeds produce identical noise patterns.
3502 For this parameter you can randomly choose any whole number. Usually it is
3503 preferable for this to be different from other seeds, but sometimes it is useful
3504 to be able to create identical noise patterns.
3506 In some noise APIs the world seed is added to the seed specified in noise
3507 parameters. This is done to make the resulting noise pattern vary in different
3508 worlds, and be 'world-specific'.
3512 The number of simple noise generators that are combined.
3513 A whole number, 1 or more.
3514 Each additional octave adds finer detail to the noise but also increases the
3515 noise calculation load.
3516 3 is a typical minimum for a high quality, complex and natural-looking noise
3517 variation. 1 octave has a slight 'gridlike' appearence.
3519 Choose the number of octaves according to the `spread` and `lacunarity`, and the
3520 size of the finest detail you require. For example:
3521 if `spread` is 512 nodes, `lacunarity` is 2.0 and finest detail required is 16
3522 nodes, octaves will be 6 because the 'wavelengths' of the octaves will be
3523 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16 nodes.
3524 Warning: If the 'wavelength' of any octave falls below 1 an error will occur.
3528 Each additional octave has an amplitude that is the amplitude of the previous
3529 octave multiplied by `persistence`, to reduce the amplitude of finer details,
3530 as is often helpful and natural to do so.
3531 Since this controls the balance of fine detail to large-scale detail
3532 `persistence` can be thought of as the 'roughness' of the noise.
3534 A positive or negative non-zero number, often between 0.3 and 1.0.
3535 A common medium value is 0.5, such that each octave has half the amplitude of
3536 the previous octave.
3537 This may need to be tuned when altering `lacunarity`; when doing so consider
3538 that a common medium value is 1 / lacunarity.
3542 Each additional octave has a 'wavelength' that is the 'wavelength' of the
3543 previous octave multiplied by 1 / lacunarity, to create finer detail.
3544 'lacunarity' is often 2.0 so 'wavelength' often halves per octave.
3546 A positive number no smaller than 1.0.
3547 Values below 2.0 create higher quality noise at the expense of requiring more
3548 octaves to cover a paticular range of 'wavelengths'.
3552 Leave this field unset for no special handling.
3553 Currently supported are `defaults`, `eased` and `absvalue`:
3557 Specify this if you would like to keep auto-selection of eased/not-eased while
3558 specifying some other flags.
3562 Maps noise gradient values onto a quintic S-curve before performing
3563 interpolation. This results in smooth, rolling noise.
3564 Disable this (`noeased`) for sharp-looking noise with a slightly gridded
3566 If no flags are specified (or defaults is), 2D noise is eased and 3D noise is
3568 Easing a 3D noise significantly increases the noise calculation load, so use
3573 The absolute value of each octave's noise variation is used when combining the
3574 octaves. The final perlin noise variation is created as follows:
3576 noise = offset + scale * (abs(octave1) +
3577 abs(octave2) * persistence +
3578 abs(octave3) * persistence ^ 2 +
3579 abs(octave4) * persistence ^ 3 +
3584 For 2D or 3D perlin noise or perlin noise maps:
3589 spread = {x = 500, y = 500, z = 500},
3594 flags = "defaults, absvalue",
3597 For 2D noise the Z component of `spread` is still defined but is ignored.
3598 A single noise parameter table can be used for 2D or 3D noise.
3609 These tell in what manner the ore is generated.
3611 All default ores are of the uniformly-distributed scatter type.
3615 Randomly chooses a location and generates a cluster of ore.
3617 If `noise_params` is specified, the ore will be placed if the 3D perlin noise
3618 at that point is greater than the `noise_threshold`, giving the ability to
3619 create a non-equal distribution of ore.
3623 Creates a sheet of ore in a blob shape according to the 2D perlin noise
3624 described by `noise_params` and `noise_threshold`. This is essentially an
3625 improved version of the so-called "stratus" ore seen in some unofficial mods.
3627 This sheet consists of vertical columns of uniform randomly distributed height,
3628 varying between the inclusive range `column_height_min` and `column_height_max`.
3629 If `column_height_min` is not specified, this parameter defaults to 1.
3630 If `column_height_max` is not specified, this parameter defaults to `clust_size`
3631 for reverse compatibility. New code should prefer `column_height_max`.
3633 The `column_midpoint_factor` parameter controls the position of the column at
3634 which ore emanates from.
3635 If 1, columns grow upward. If 0, columns grow downward. If 0.5, columns grow
3636 equally starting from each direction.
3637 `column_midpoint_factor` is a decimal number ranging in value from 0 to 1. If
3638 this parameter is not specified, the default is 0.5.
3640 The ore parameters `clust_scarcity` and `clust_num_ores` are ignored for this
3645 Creates a sheet of ore in a cloud-like puff shape.
3647 As with the `sheet` ore type, the size and shape of puffs are described by
3648 `noise_params` and `noise_threshold` and are placed at random vertical
3649 positions within the currently generated chunk.
3651 The vertical top and bottom displacement of each puff are determined by the
3652 noise parameters `np_puff_top` and `np_puff_bottom`, respectively.
3656 Creates a deformed sphere of ore according to 3d perlin noise described by
3657 `noise_params`. The maximum size of the blob is `clust_size`, and
3658 `clust_scarcity` has the same meaning as with the `scatter` type.
3662 Creates veins of ore varying in density by according to the intersection of two
3663 instances of 3d perlin noise with different seeds, both described by
3666 `random_factor` varies the influence random chance has on placement of an ore
3667 inside the vein, which is `1` by default. Note that modifying this parameter
3668 may require adjusting `noise_threshold`.
3670 The parameters `clust_scarcity`, `clust_num_ores`, and `clust_size` are ignored
3673 This ore type is difficult to control since it is sensitive to small changes.
3674 The following is a decent set of parameters to work from:
3679 spread = {x=200, y=200, z=200},
3686 noise_threshold = 1.6
3688 **WARNING**: Use this ore type *very* sparingly since it is ~200x more
3689 computationally expensive than any other ore.
3693 Creates a single undulating ore stratum that is continuous across mapchunk
3694 borders and horizontally spans the world.
3696 The 2D perlin noise described by `noise_params` defines the Y co-ordinate of
3697 the stratum midpoint. The 2D perlin noise described by `np_stratum_thickness`
3698 defines the stratum's vertical thickness (in units of nodes). Due to being
3699 continuous across mapchunk borders the stratum's vertical thickness is
3702 If the noise parameter `noise_params` is omitted the ore will occur from y_min
3703 to y_max in a simple horizontal stratum.
3705 A parameter `stratum_thickness` can be provided instead of the noise parameter
3706 `np_stratum_thickness`, to create a constant thickness.
3708 Leaving out one or both noise parameters makes the ore generation less
3709 intensive, useful when adding multiple strata.
3711 `y_min` and `y_max` define the limits of the ore generation and for performance
3712 reasons should be set as close together as possible but without clipping the
3713 stratum's Y variation.
3715 Each node in the stratum has a 1-in-`clust_scarcity` chance of being ore, so a
3716 solid-ore stratum would require a `clust_scarcity` of 1.
3718 The parameters `clust_num_ores`, `clust_size`, `noise_threshold` and
3719 `random_factor` are ignored by this ore type.
3724 See section [Flag Specifier Format].
3726 Currently supported flags:
3727 `puff_cliffs`, `puff_additive_composition`.
3731 If set, puff ore generation will not taper down large differences in
3732 displacement when approaching the edge of a puff. This flag has no effect for
3733 ore types other than `puff`.
3735 ### `puff_additive_composition`
3737 By default, when noise described by `np_puff_top` or `np_puff_bottom` results
3738 in a negative displacement, the sub-column at that point is not generated. With
3739 this attribute set, puff ore generation will instead generate the absolute
3740 difference in noise displacement values. This flag has no effect for ore types
3749 The varying types of decorations that can be placed.
3754 Creates a 1 times `H` times 1 column of a specified node (or a random node from
3755 a list, if a decoration list is specified). Can specify a certain node it must
3756 spawn next to, such as water or lava, for example. Can also generate a
3757 decoration of random height between a specified lower and upper bound.
3758 This type of decoration is intended for placement of grass, flowers, cacti,
3759 papyri, waterlilies and so on.
3764 Copies a box of `MapNodes` from a specified schematic file (or raw description).
3765 Can specify a probability of a node randomly appearing when placed.
3766 This decoration type is intended to be used for multi-node sized discrete
3767 structures, such as trees, cave spikes, rocks, and so on.
3776 --------------------
3778 A schematic specifier identifies a schematic by either a filename to a
3779 Minetest Schematic file (`.mts`) or through raw data supplied through Lua,
3780 in the form of a table. This table specifies the following fields:
3782 * The `size` field is a 3D vector containing the dimensions of the provided
3783 schematic. (required field)
3784 * The `yslice_prob` field is a table of {ypos, prob} slice tables. A slice table
3785 sets the probability of a particular horizontal slice of the schematic being
3786 placed. (optional field)
3787 `ypos` = 0 for the lowest horizontal slice of a schematic.
3788 The default of `prob` is 255.
3789 * The `data` field is a flat table of MapNode tables making up the schematic,
3790 in the order of `[z [y [x]]]`. (required field)
3791 Each MapNode table contains:
3792 * `name`: the name of the map node to place (required)
3793 * `prob` (alias `param1`): the probability of this node being placed
3795 * `param2`: the raw param2 value of the node being placed onto the map
3797 * `force_place`: boolean representing if the node should forcibly overwrite
3798 any previous contents (default: false)
3800 About probability values:
3802 * A probability value of `0` or `1` means that node will never appear
3804 * A probability value of `254` or `255` means the node will always appear
3806 * If the probability value `p` is greater than `1`, then there is a
3807 `(p / 256 * 100)` percent chance that node will appear when the schematic is
3810 Schematic attributes
3811 --------------------
3813 See section [Flag Specifier Format].
3815 Currently supported flags: `place_center_x`, `place_center_y`, `place_center_z`,
3818 * `place_center_x`: Placement of this decoration is centered along the X axis.
3819 * `place_center_y`: Placement of this decoration is centered along the Y axis.
3820 * `place_center_z`: Placement of this decoration is centered along the Z axis.
3821 * `force_placement`: Schematic nodes other than "ignore" will replace existing
3827 Lua Voxel Manipulator
3828 =====================
3833 VoxelManip is a scripting interface to the internal 'Map Voxel Manipulator'
3834 facility. The purpose of this object is for fast, low-level, bulk access to
3835 reading and writing Map content. As such, setting map nodes through VoxelManip
3836 will lack many of the higher level features and concepts you may be used to
3837 with other methods of setting nodes. For example, nodes will not have their
3838 construction and destruction callbacks run, and no rollback information is
3841 It is important to note that VoxelManip is designed for speed, and *not* ease
3842 of use or flexibility. If your mod requires a map manipulation facility that
3843 will handle 100% of all edge cases, or the use of high level node placement
3844 features, perhaps `minetest.set_node()` is better suited for the job.
3846 In addition, VoxelManip might not be faster, or could even be slower, for your
3847 specific use case. VoxelManip is most effective when setting large areas of map
3848 at once - for example, if only setting a 3x3x3 node area, a
3849 `minetest.set_node()` loop may be more optimal. Always profile code using both
3850 methods of map manipulation to determine which is most appropriate for your
3853 A recent simple test of setting cubic areas showed that `minetest.set_node()`
3854 is faster than a VoxelManip for a 3x3x3 node cube or smaller.
3859 A VoxelManip object can be created any time using either:
3860 `VoxelManip([p1, p2])`, or `minetest.get_voxel_manip([p1, p2])`.
3862 If the optional position parameters are present for either of these routines,
3863 the specified region will be pre-loaded into the VoxelManip object on creation.
3864 Otherwise, the area of map you wish to manipulate must first be loaded into the
3865 VoxelManip object using `VoxelManip:read_from_map()`.
3867 Note that `VoxelManip:read_from_map()` returns two position vectors. The region
3868 formed by these positions indicate the minimum and maximum (respectively)
3869 positions of the area actually loaded in the VoxelManip, which may be larger
3870 than the area requested. For convenience, the loaded area coordinates can also
3871 be queried any time after loading map data with `VoxelManip:get_emerged_area()`.
3873 Now that the VoxelManip object is populated with map data, your mod can fetch a
3874 copy of this data using either of two methods. `VoxelManip:get_node_at()`,
3875 which retrieves an individual node in a MapNode formatted table at the position
3876 requested is the simplest method to use, but also the slowest.
3878 Nodes in a VoxelManip object may also be read in bulk to a flat array table
3881 * `VoxelManip:get_data()` for node content (in Content ID form, see section
3883 * `VoxelManip:get_light_data()` for node light levels, and
3884 * `VoxelManip:get_param2_data()` for the node type-dependent "param2" values.
3886 See section [Flat array format] for more details.
3888 It is very important to understand that the tables returned by any of the above
3889 three functions represent a snapshot of the VoxelManip's internal state at the
3890 time of the call. This copy of the data will not magically update itself if
3891 another function modifies the internal VoxelManip state.
3892 Any functions that modify a VoxelManip's contents work on the VoxelManip's
3893 internal state unless otherwise explicitly stated.
3895 Once the bulk data has been edited to your liking, the internal VoxelManip
3896 state can be set using:
3898 * `VoxelManip:set_data()` for node content (in Content ID form, see section
3900 * `VoxelManip:set_light_data()` for node light levels, and
3901 * `VoxelManip:set_param2_data()` for the node type-dependent `param2` values.
3903 The parameter to each of the above three functions can use any table at all in
3904 the same flat array format as produced by `get_data()` etc. and is not required
3905 to be a table retrieved from `get_data()`.
3907 Once the internal VoxelManip state has been modified to your liking, the
3908 changes can be committed back to the map by calling `VoxelManip:write_to_map()`
3910 ### Flat array format
3913 `Nx = p2.X - p1.X + 1`,
3914 `Ny = p2.Y - p1.Y + 1`, and
3915 `Nz = p2.Z - p1.Z + 1`.
3917 Then, for a loaded region of p1..p2, this array ranges from `1` up to and
3918 including the value of the expression `Nx * Ny * Nz`.
3920 Positions offset from p1 are present in the array with the format of:
3923 (0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (2, 0, 0), ... (Nx, 0, 0),
3924 (0, 1, 0), (1, 1, 0), (2, 1, 0), ... (Nx, 1, 0),
3926 (0, Ny, 0), (1, Ny, 0), (2, Ny, 0), ... (Nx, Ny, 0),
3927 (0, 0, 1), (1, 0, 1), (2, 0, 1), ... (Nx, 0, 1),
3929 (0, Ny, 2), (1, Ny, 2), (2, Ny, 2), ... (Nx, Ny, 2),
3931 (0, Ny, Nz), (1, Ny, Nz), (2, Ny, Nz), ... (Nx, Ny, Nz)
3934 and the array index for a position p contained completely in p1..p2 is:
3936 `(p.Z - p1.Z) * Ny * Nx + (p.Y - p1.Y) * Nx + (p.X - p1.X) + 1`
3938 Note that this is the same "flat 3D array" format as
3939 `PerlinNoiseMap:get3dMap_flat()`.
3940 VoxelArea objects (see section [`VoxelArea`]) can be used to simplify calculation
3941 of the index for a single point in a flat VoxelManip array.
3945 A Content ID is a unique integer identifier for a specific node type.
3946 These IDs are used by VoxelManip in place of the node name string for
3947 `VoxelManip:get_data()` and `VoxelManip:set_data()`. You can use
3948 `minetest.get_content_id()` to look up the Content ID for the specified node
3949 name, and `minetest.get_name_from_content_id()` to look up the node name string
3950 for a given Content ID.
3951 After registration of a node, its Content ID will remain the same throughout
3952 execution of the mod.
3953 Note that the node being queried needs to have already been been registered.
3955 The following builtin node types have their Content IDs defined as constants:
3957 * `minetest.CONTENT_UNKNOWN`: ID for "unknown" nodes
3958 * `minetest.CONTENT_AIR`: ID for "air" nodes
3959 * `minetest.CONTENT_IGNORE`: ID for "ignore" nodes
3961 ### Mapgen VoxelManip objects
3963 Inside of `on_generated()` callbacks, it is possible to retrieve the same
3964 VoxelManip object used by the core's Map Generator (commonly abbreviated
3965 Mapgen). Most of the rules previously described still apply but with a few
3968 * The Mapgen VoxelManip object is retrieved using:
3969 `minetest.get_mapgen_object("voxelmanip")`
3970 * This VoxelManip object already has the region of map just generated loaded
3971 into it; it's not necessary to call `VoxelManip:read_from_map()` before using
3972 a Mapgen VoxelManip.
3973 * The `on_generated()` callbacks of some mods may place individual nodes in the
3974 generated area using non-VoxelManip map modification methods. Because the
3975 same Mapgen VoxelManip object is passed through each `on_generated()`
3976 callback, it becomes necessary for the Mapgen VoxelManip object to maintain
3977 consistency with the current map state. For this reason, calling any of the
3978 following functions:
3979 `minetest.add_node()`, `minetest.set_node()`, or `minetest.swap_node()`
3980 will also update the Mapgen VoxelManip object's internal state active on the
3982 * After modifying the Mapgen VoxelManip object's internal buffer, it may be
3983 necessary to update lighting information using either:
3984 `VoxelManip:calc_lighting()` or `VoxelManip:set_lighting()`.
3986 ### Other API functions operating on a VoxelManip
3988 If any VoxelManip contents were set to a liquid node,
3989 `VoxelManip:update_liquids()` must be called for these liquid nodes to begin
3990 flowing. It is recommended to call this function only after having written all
3991 buffered data back to the VoxelManip object, save for special situations where
3992 the modder desires to only have certain liquid nodes begin flowing.
3994 The functions `minetest.generate_ores()` and `minetest.generate_decorations()`
3995 will generate all registered decorations and ores throughout the full area
3996 inside of the specified VoxelManip object.
3998 `minetest.place_schematic_on_vmanip()` is otherwise identical to
3999 `minetest.place_schematic()`, except instead of placing the specified schematic
4000 directly on the map at the specified position, it will place the schematic
4001 inside the VoxelManip.
4005 * Attempting to read data from a VoxelManip object before map is read will
4006 result in a zero-length array table for `VoxelManip:get_data()`, and an
4007 "ignore" node at any position for `VoxelManip:get_node_at()`.
4008 * If either a region of map has not yet been generated or is out-of-bounds of
4009 the map, that region is filled with "ignore" nodes.
4010 * Other mods, or the core itself, could possibly modify the area of map
4011 currently loaded into a VoxelManip object. With the exception of Mapgen
4012 VoxelManips (see above section), the internal buffers are not updated. For
4013 this reason, it is strongly encouraged to complete the usage of a particular
4014 VoxelManip object in the same callback it had been created.
4015 * If a VoxelManip object will be used often, such as in an `on_generated()`
4016 callback, consider passing a file-scoped table as the optional parameter to
4017 `VoxelManip:get_data()`, which serves as a static buffer the function can use
4018 to write map data to instead of returning a new table each call. This greatly
4019 enhances performance by avoiding unnecessary memory allocations.
4024 * `read_from_map(p1, p2)`: Loads a chunk of map into the VoxelManip object
4025 containing the region formed by `p1` and `p2`.
4026 * returns actual emerged `pmin`, actual emerged `pmax`
4027 * `write_to_map([light])`: Writes the data loaded from the `VoxelManip` back to
4029 * **important**: data must be set using `VoxelManip:set_data()` before
4031 * if `light` is true, then lighting is automatically recalculated.
4032 The default value is true.
4033 If `light` is false, no light calculations happen, and you should correct
4034 all modified blocks with `minetest.fix_light()` as soon as possible.
4035 Keep in mind that modifying the map where light is incorrect can cause
4037 * `get_node_at(pos)`: Returns a `MapNode` table of the node currently loaded in
4038 the `VoxelManip` at that position
4039 * `set_node_at(pos, node)`: Sets a specific `MapNode` in the `VoxelManip` at
4041 * `get_data([buffer])`: Retrieves the node content data loaded into the
4042 `VoxelManip` object.
4043 * returns raw node data in the form of an array of node content IDs
4044 * if the param `buffer` is present, this table will be used to store the
4046 * `set_data(data)`: Sets the data contents of the `VoxelManip` object
4047 * `update_map()`: Does nothing, kept for compatibility.
4048 * `set_lighting(light, [p1, p2])`: Set the lighting within the `VoxelManip` to
4050 * `light` is a table, `{day=<0...15>, night=<0...15>}`
4051 * To be used only by a `VoxelManip` object from
4052 `minetest.get_mapgen_object`.
4053 * (`p1`, `p2`) is the area in which lighting is set, defaults to the whole
4055 * `get_light_data()`: Gets the light data read into the `VoxelManip` object
4056 * Returns an array (indices 1 to volume) of integers ranging from `0` to
4058 * Each value is the bitwise combination of day and night light values
4060 * `light = day + (night * 16)`
4061 * `set_light_data(light_data)`: Sets the `param1` (light) contents of each node
4062 in the `VoxelManip`.
4063 * expects lighting data in the same format that `get_light_data()` returns
4064 * `get_param2_data([buffer])`: Gets the raw `param2` data read into the
4065 `VoxelManip` object.
4066 * Returns an array (indices 1 to volume) of integers ranging from `0` to
4068 * If the param `buffer` is present, this table will be used to store the
4070 * `set_param2_data(param2_data)`: Sets the `param2` contents of each node in
4072 * `calc_lighting([p1, p2], [propagate_shadow])`: Calculate lighting within the
4074 * To be used only by a `VoxelManip` object from
4075 `minetest.get_mapgen_object`.
4076 * (`p1`, `p2`) is the area in which lighting is set, defaults to the whole
4077 area if left out or nil. For almost all uses these should be left out
4078 or nil to use the default.
4079 * `propagate_shadow` is an optional boolean deciding whether shadows in a
4080 generated mapchunk above are propagated down into the mapchunk, defaults
4081 to `true` if left out.
4082 * `update_liquids()`: Update liquid flow
4083 * `was_modified()`: Returns `true` or `false` if the data in the voxel
4084 manipulator had been modified since the last read from map, due to a call to
4085 `minetest.set_data()` on the loaded area elsewhere.
4086 * `get_emerged_area()`: Returns actual emerged minimum and maximum positions.
4091 A helper class for voxel areas.
4092 It can be created via `VoxelArea:new{MinEdge = pmin, MaxEdge = pmax}`.
4093 The coordinates are *inclusive*, like most other things in Minetest.
4097 * `getExtent()`: returns a 3D vector containing the size of the area formed by
4098 `MinEdge` and `MaxEdge`.
4099 * `getVolume()`: returns the volume of the area formed by `MinEdge` and
4101 * `index(x, y, z)`: returns the index of an absolute position in a flat array
4103 * `x`, `y` and `z` must be integers to avoid an incorrect index result.
4104 * The position (x, y, z) is not checked for being inside the area volume,
4105 being outside can cause an incorrect index result.
4106 * Useful for things like `VoxelManip`, raw Schematic specifiers,
4107 `PerlinNoiseMap:get2d`/`3dMap`, and so on.
4108 * `indexp(p)`: same functionality as `index(x, y, z)` but takes a vector.
4109 * As with `index(x, y, z)`, the components of `p` must be integers, and `p`
4110 is not checked for being inside the area volume.
4111 * `position(i)`: returns the absolute position vector corresponding to index
4113 * `contains(x, y, z)`: check if (`x`,`y`,`z`) is inside area formed by
4114 `MinEdge` and `MaxEdge`.
4115 * `containsp(p)`: same as above, except takes a vector
4116 * `containsi(i)`: same as above, except takes an index `i`
4117 * `iter(minx, miny, minz, maxx, maxy, maxz)`: returns an iterator that returns
4119 * from (`minx`,`miny`,`minz`) to (`maxx`,`maxy`,`maxz`) in the order of
4121 * `iterp(minp, maxp)`: same as above, except takes a vector
4123 ### Y stride and z stride of a flat array
4125 For a particular position in a voxel area, whose flat array index is known,
4126 it is often useful to know the index of a neighboring or nearby position.
4127 The table below shows the changes of index required for 1 node movements along
4128 the axes in a voxel area:
4130 Movement Change of index
4140 local area = VoxelArea:new{MinEdge = emin, MaxEdge = emax}
4142 The values of `ystride` and `zstride` can be obtained using `area.ystride` and
4151 A mapgen object is a construct used in map generation. Mapgen objects can be
4152 used by an `on_generate` callback to speed up operations by avoiding
4153 unnecessary recalculations, these can be retrieved using the
4154 `minetest.get_mapgen_object()` function. If the requested Mapgen object is
4155 unavailable, or `get_mapgen_object()` was called outside of an `on_generate()`
4156 callback, `nil` is returned.
4158 The following Mapgen objects are currently available:
4162 This returns three values; the `VoxelManip` object to be used, minimum and
4163 maximum emerged position, in that order. All mapgens support this object.
4167 Returns an array containing the y coordinates of the ground levels of nodes in
4168 the most recently generated chunk by the current mapgen.
4172 Returns an array containing the biome IDs of nodes in the most recently
4173 generated chunk by the current mapgen.
4177 Returns an array containing the temperature values of nodes in the most
4178 recently generated chunk by the current mapgen.
4182 Returns an array containing the humidity values of nodes in the most recently
4183 generated chunk by the current mapgen.
4187 Returns a table mapping requested generation notification types to arrays of
4188 positions at which the corresponding generated structures are located within
4189 the current chunk. To set the capture of positions of interest to be recorded
4190 on generate, use `minetest.set_gen_notify()`.
4191 For decorations, the returned positions are the ground surface 'place_on'
4192 nodes, not the decorations themselves. A 'simple' type decoration is often 1
4193 node above the returned position and possibly displaced by 'place_offset_y'.
4195 Possible fields of the table returned are:
4201 * `large_cave_begin`
4205 Decorations have a key in the format of `"decoration#id"`, where `id` is the
4206 numeric unique decoration ID as returned by `minetest.get_decoration_id`.
4214 Functions receive a "luaentity" as `self`:
4216 * It has the member `.name`, which is the registered name `("mod:thing")`
4217 * It has the member `.object`, which is an `ObjectRef` pointing to the object
4218 * The original prototype stuff is visible directly via a metatable
4222 * `on_activate(self, staticdata, dtime_s)`
4223 * Called when the object is instantiated.
4224 * `dtime_s` is the time passed since the object was unloaded, which can be
4225 used for updating the entity state.
4226 * `on_deactivate(self)
4227 * Called when the object is about to get removed or unloaded.
4228 * `on_step(self, dtime)`
4229 * Called on every server tick, after movement and collision processing.
4230 `dtime` is usually 0.1 seconds, as per the `dedicated_server_step` setting
4232 * `on_punch(self, puncher, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, dir, damage)`
4233 * Called when somebody punches the object.
4234 * Note that you probably want to handle most punches using the automatic
4236 * `puncher`: an `ObjectRef` (can be `nil`)
4237 * `time_from_last_punch`: Meant for disallowing spamming of clicks
4239 * `tool_capabilities`: capability table of used tool (can be `nil`)
4240 * `dir`: unit vector of direction of punch. Always defined. Points from the
4241 puncher to the punched.
4242 * `damage`: damage that will be done to entity.
4243 * Can return `true` to prevent the default damage mechanism.
4244 * `on_death(self, killer)`
4245 * Called when the object dies.
4246 * `killer`: an `ObjectRef` (can be `nil`)
4247 * `on_rightclick(self, clicker)`
4248 * `on_attach_child(self, child)`
4249 * `child`: an `ObjectRef` of the child that attaches
4250 * `on_detach_child(self, child)`
4251 * `child`: an `ObjectRef` of the child that detaches
4252 * `on_detach(self, parent)`
4253 * `parent`: an `ObjectRef` (can be `nil`) from where it got detached
4254 * This happens before the parent object is removed from the world
4255 * `get_staticdata(self)`
4256 * Should return a string that will be passed to `on_activate` when the
4257 object is instantiated the next time.
4269 axiom, --string initial tree axiom
4270 rules_a, --string rules set A
4271 rules_b, --string rules set B
4272 rules_c, --string rules set C
4273 rules_d, --string rules set D
4274 trunk, --string trunk node name
4275 leaves, --string leaves node name
4276 leaves2, --string secondary leaves node name
4277 leaves2_chance,--num chance (0-100) to replace leaves with leaves2
4278 angle, --num angle in deg
4279 iterations, --num max # of iterations, usually 2 -5
4280 random_level, --num factor to lower nr of iterations, usually 0 - 3
4281 trunk_type, --string single/double/crossed) type of trunk: 1 node,
4282 -- 2x2 nodes or 3x3 in cross shape
4283 thin_branches, --boolean true -> use thin (1 node) branches
4284 fruit, --string fruit node name
4285 fruit_chance, --num chance (0-100) to replace leaves with fruit node
4286 seed, --num random seed, if no seed is provided, the engine
4290 Key for special L-System symbols used in axioms
4291 -----------------------------------------------
4293 * `G`: move forward one unit with the pen up
4294 * `F`: move forward one unit with the pen down drawing trunks and branches
4295 * `f`: move forward one unit with the pen down drawing leaves (100% chance)
4296 * `T`: move forward one unit with the pen down drawing trunks only
4297 * `R`: move forward one unit with the pen down placing fruit
4298 * `A`: replace with rules set A
4299 * `B`: replace with rules set B
4300 * `C`: replace with rules set C
4301 * `D`: replace with rules set D
4302 * `a`: replace with rules set A, chance 90%
4303 * `b`: replace with rules set B, chance 80%
4304 * `c`: replace with rules set C, chance 70%
4305 * `d`: replace with rules set D, chance 60%
4306 * `+`: yaw the turtle right by `angle` parameter
4307 * `-`: yaw the turtle left by `angle` parameter
4308 * `&`: pitch the turtle down by `angle` parameter
4309 * `^`: pitch the turtle up by `angle` parameter
4310 * `/`: roll the turtle to the right by `angle` parameter
4311 * `*`: roll the turtle to the left by `angle` parameter
4312 * `[`: save in stack current state info
4313 * `]`: recover from stack state info
4318 Spawn a small apple tree:
4320 pos = {x=230,y=20,z=4}
4323 rules_a="[&&&FFFFF&&FFFF][&&&++++FFFFF&&FFFF][&&&----FFFFF&&FFFF]",
4324 rules_b="[&&&++FFFFF&&FFFF][&&&--FFFFF&&FFFF][&&&------FFFFF&&FFFF]",
4325 trunk="default:tree",
4326 leaves="default:leaves",
4330 trunk_type="single",
4333 fruit="default:apple"
4335 minetest.spawn_tree(pos,apple_tree)
4340 'minetest' namespace reference
4341 ==============================
4346 * `minetest.get_current_modname()`: returns the currently loading mod's name,
4348 * `minetest.get_modpath(modname)`: returns the directory path for a mod,
4349 e.g. `"/home/user/.minetest/usermods/modname"`.
4350 * Returns nil if the mod is not enabled or does not exist (not installed).
4351 * Works regardless of whether the mod has been loaded yet.
4352 * Useful for loading additional `.lua` modules or static data from a mod,
4353 or checking if a mod is enabled.
4354 * `minetest.get_modnames()`: returns a list of enabled mods, sorted alphabetically.
4355 * Does not include disabled mods, even if they are installed.
4356 * `minetest.get_worldpath()`: returns e.g. `"/home/user/.minetest/world"`
4357 * Useful for storing custom data
4358 * `minetest.is_singleplayer()`
4359 * `minetest.features`: Table containing API feature flags
4362 glasslike_framed = true, -- 0.4.7
4363 nodebox_as_selectionbox = true, -- 0.4.7
4364 get_all_craft_recipes_works = true, -- 0.4.7
4365 -- The transparency channel of textures can optionally be used on
4367 use_texture_alpha = true,
4368 -- Tree and grass ABMs are no longer done from C++ (0.4.8)
4369 no_legacy_abms = true,
4370 -- Texture grouping is possible using parentheses (0.4.11)
4371 texture_names_parens = true,
4372 -- Unique Area ID for AreaStore:insert_area (0.4.14)
4373 area_store_custom_ids = true,
4374 -- add_entity supports passing initial staticdata to on_activate
4376 add_entity_with_staticdata = true,
4377 -- Chat messages are no longer predicted (0.4.16)
4378 no_chat_message_prediction = true,
4379 -- The transparency channel of textures can optionally be used on
4380 -- objects (ie: players and lua entities) (5.0.0)
4381 object_use_texture_alpha = true,
4382 -- Object selectionbox is settable independently from collisionbox
4384 object_independent_selectionbox = true,
4385 -- Specifies whether binary data can be uploaded or downloaded using
4386 -- the HTTP API (5.1.0)
4387 httpfetch_binary_data = true,
4388 -- Whether formspec_version[<version>] may be used (5.1.0)
4389 formspec_version_element = true,
4390 -- Whether AreaStore's IDs are kept on save/load (5.1.0)
4391 area_store_persistent_ids = true,
4392 -- Whether minetest.find_path is functional (5.2.0)
4393 pathfinder_works = true,
4394 -- Whether Collision info is available to an objects' on_step (5.3.0)
4395 object_step_has_moveresult = true,
4396 -- Whether get_velocity() and add_velocity() can be used on players (5.4.0)
4397 direct_velocity_on_players = true,
4398 -- nodedef's use_texture_alpha accepts new string modes (5.4.0)
4399 use_texture_alpha_string_modes = true,
4400 -- degrotate param2 rotates in units of 1.5° instead of 2°
4401 -- thus changing the range of values from 0-179 to 0-240 (5.5.0)
4402 degrotate_240_steps = true,
4405 * `minetest.has_feature(arg)`: returns `boolean, missing_features`
4406 * `arg`: string or table in format `{foo=true, bar=true}`
4407 * `missing_features`: `{foo=true, bar=true}`
4408 * `minetest.get_player_information(player_name)`: Table containing information
4409 about a player. Example return value:
4412 address = "127.0.0.1", -- IP address of client
4413 ip_version = 4, -- IPv4 / IPv6
4414 connection_uptime = 200, -- seconds since client connected
4415 protocol_version = 32, -- protocol version used by client
4416 formspec_version = 2, -- supported formspec version
4417 lang_code = "fr" -- Language code used for translation
4418 -- the following keys can be missing if no stats have been collected yet
4419 min_rtt = 0.01, -- minimum round trip time
4420 max_rtt = 0.2, -- maximum round trip time
4421 avg_rtt = 0.02, -- average round trip time
4422 min_jitter = 0.01, -- minimum packet time jitter
4423 max_jitter = 0.5, -- maximum packet time jitter
4424 avg_jitter = 0.03, -- average packet time jitter
4425 -- the following information is available in a debug build only!!!
4426 -- DO NOT USE IN MODS
4427 --ser_vers = 26, -- serialization version used by client
4428 --major = 0, -- major version number
4429 --minor = 4, -- minor version number
4430 --patch = 10, -- patch version number
4431 --vers_string = "0.4.9-git", -- full version string
4432 --state = "Active" -- current client state
4435 * `minetest.mkdir(path)`: returns success.
4436 * Creates a directory specified by `path`, creating parent directories
4437 if they don't exist.
4438 * `minetest.get_dir_list(path, [is_dir])`: returns list of entry names
4440 * nil: return all entries,
4441 * true: return only subdirectory names, or
4442 * false: return only file names.
4443 * `minetest.safe_file_write(path, content)`: returns boolean indicating success
4444 * Replaces contents of file at path with new contents in a safe (atomic)
4445 way. Use this instead of below code when writing e.g. database files:
4446 `local f = io.open(path, "wb"); f:write(content); f:close()`
4447 * `minetest.get_version()`: returns a table containing components of the
4448 engine version. Components:
4449 * `project`: Name of the project, eg, "Minetest"
4450 * `string`: Simple version, eg, "1.2.3-dev"
4451 * `hash`: Full git version (only set if available),
4452 eg, "1.2.3-dev-01234567-dirty".
4453 Use this for informational purposes only. The information in the returned
4454 table does not represent the capabilities of the engine, nor is it
4455 reliable or verifiable. Compatible forks will have a different name and
4456 version entirely. To check for the presence of engine features, test
4457 whether the functions exported by the wanted features exist. For example:
4458 `if minetest.check_for_falling then ... end`.
4459 * `minetest.sha1(data, [raw])`: returns the sha1 hash of data
4460 * `data`: string of data to hash
4461 * `raw`: return raw bytes instead of hex digits, default: false
4466 * `minetest.debug(...)`
4467 * Equivalent to `minetest.log(table.concat({...}, "\t"))`
4468 * `minetest.log([level,] text)`
4469 * `level` is one of `"none"`, `"error"`, `"warning"`, `"action"`,
4470 `"info"`, or `"verbose"`. Default is `"none"`.
4472 Registration functions
4473 ----------------------
4475 Call these functions only at load time!
4479 * `minetest.register_node(name, node definition)`
4480 * `minetest.register_craftitem(name, item definition)`
4481 * `minetest.register_tool(name, item definition)`
4482 * `minetest.override_item(name, redefinition)`
4483 * Overrides fields of an item registered with register_node/tool/craftitem.
4484 * Note: Item must already be defined, (opt)depend on the mod defining it.
4485 * Example: `minetest.override_item("default:mese",
4486 {light_source=minetest.LIGHT_MAX})`
4487 * `minetest.unregister_item(name)`
4488 * Unregisters the item from the engine, and deletes the entry with key
4489 `name` from `minetest.registered_items` and from the associated item table
4490 according to its nature: `minetest.registered_nodes`, etc.
4491 * `minetest.register_entity(name, entity definition)`
4492 * `minetest.register_abm(abm definition)`
4493 * `minetest.register_lbm(lbm definition)`
4494 * `minetest.register_alias(alias, original_name)`
4495 * Also use this to set the 'mapgen aliases' needed in a game for the core
4496 mapgens. See [Mapgen aliases] section above.
4497 * `minetest.register_alias_force(alias, original_name)`
4498 * `minetest.register_ore(ore definition)`
4499 * Returns an integer object handle uniquely identifying the registered
4501 * The order of ore registrations determines the order of ore generation.
4502 * `minetest.register_biome(biome definition)`
4503 * Returns an integer object handle uniquely identifying the registered
4504 biome on success. To get the biome ID, use `minetest.get_biome_id`.
4505 * `minetest.unregister_biome(name)`
4506 * Unregisters the biome from the engine, and deletes the entry with key
4507 `name` from `minetest.registered_biomes`.
4508 * Warning: This alters the biome to biome ID correspondences, so any
4509 decorations or ores using the 'biomes' field must afterwards be cleared
4511 * `minetest.register_decoration(decoration definition)`
4512 * Returns an integer object handle uniquely identifying the registered
4513 decoration on success. To get the decoration ID, use
4514 `minetest.get_decoration_id`.
4515 * The order of decoration registrations determines the order of decoration
4517 * `minetest.register_schematic(schematic definition)`
4518 * Returns an integer object handle uniquely identifying the registered
4519 schematic on success.
4520 * If the schematic is loaded from a file, the `name` field is set to the
4522 * If the function is called when loading the mod, and `name` is a relative
4523 path, then the current mod path will be prepended to the schematic
4525 * `minetest.clear_registered_biomes()`
4526 * Clears all biomes currently registered.
4527 * Warning: Clearing and re-registering biomes alters the biome to biome ID
4528 correspondences, so any decorations or ores using the 'biomes' field must
4529 afterwards be cleared and re-registered.
4530 * `minetest.clear_registered_decorations()`
4531 * Clears all decorations currently registered.
4532 * `minetest.clear_registered_ores()`
4533 * Clears all ores currently registered.
4534 * `minetest.clear_registered_schematics()`
4535 * Clears all schematics currently registered.
4539 * `minetest.register_craft(recipe)`
4540 * Check recipe table syntax for different types below.
4541 * `minetest.clear_craft(recipe)`
4542 * Will erase existing craft based either on output item or on input recipe.
4543 * Specify either output or input only. If you specify both, input will be
4544 ignored. For input use the same recipe table syntax as for
4545 `minetest.register_craft(recipe)`. For output specify only the item,
4547 * Returns false if no erase candidate could be found, otherwise returns true.
4548 * **Warning**! The type field ("shaped", "cooking" or any other) will be
4549 ignored if the recipe contains output. Erasing is then done independently
4550 from the crafting method.
4551 * `minetest.register_chatcommand(cmd, chatcommand definition)`
4552 * `minetest.override_chatcommand(name, redefinition)`
4553 * Overrides fields of a chatcommand registered with `register_chatcommand`.
4554 * `minetest.unregister_chatcommand(name)`
4555 * Unregisters a chatcommands registered with `register_chatcommand`.
4556 * `minetest.register_privilege(name, definition)`
4557 * `definition` can be a description or a definition table (see [Privilege
4559 * If it is a description, the priv will be granted to singleplayer and admin
4561 * To allow players with `basic_privs` to grant, see the `basic_privs`
4562 minetest.conf setting.
4563 * `minetest.register_authentication_handler(authentication handler definition)`
4564 * Registers an auth handler that overrides the builtin one.
4565 * This function can be called by a single mod once only.
4567 Global callback registration functions
4568 --------------------------------------
4570 Call these functions only at load time!
4572 * `minetest.register_globalstep(function(dtime))`
4573 * Called every server step, usually interval of 0.1s
4574 * `minetest.register_on_mods_loaded(function())`
4575 * Called after mods have finished loading and before the media is cached or the
4577 * `minetest.register_on_shutdown(function())`
4578 * Called before server shutdown
4579 * **Warning**: If the server terminates abnormally (i.e. crashes), the
4580 registered callbacks **will likely not be run**. Data should be saved at
4581 semi-frequent intervals as well as on server shutdown.
4582 * `minetest.register_on_placenode(function(pos, newnode, placer, oldnode, itemstack, pointed_thing))`
4583 * Called when a node has been placed
4584 * If return `true` no item is taken from `itemstack`
4585 * `placer` may be any valid ObjectRef or nil.
4586 * **Not recommended**; use `on_construct` or `after_place_node` in node
4587 definition whenever possible.
4588 * `minetest.register_on_dignode(function(pos, oldnode, digger))`
4589 * Called when a node has been dug.
4590 * **Not recommended**; Use `on_destruct` or `after_dig_node` in node
4591 definition whenever possible.
4592 * `minetest.register_on_punchnode(function(pos, node, puncher, pointed_thing))`
4593 * Called when a node is punched
4594 * `minetest.register_on_generated(function(minp, maxp, blockseed))`
4595 * Called after generating a piece of world. Modifying nodes inside the area
4596 is a bit faster than usually.
4597 * `minetest.register_on_newplayer(function(ObjectRef))`
4598 * Called when a new player enters the world for the first time
4599 * `minetest.register_on_punchplayer(function(player, hitter, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, dir, damage))`
4600 * Called when a player is punched
4601 * Note: This callback is invoked even if the punched player is dead.
4602 * `player`: ObjectRef - Player that was punched
4603 * `hitter`: ObjectRef - Player that hit
4604 * `time_from_last_punch`: Meant for disallowing spamming of clicks
4606 * `tool_capabilities`: Capability table of used tool (can be nil)
4607 * `dir`: Unit vector of direction of punch. Always defined. Points from
4608 the puncher to the punched.
4609 * `damage`: Number that represents the damage calculated by the engine
4610 * should return `true` to prevent the default damage mechanism
4611 * `minetest.register_on_rightclickplayer(function(player, clicker))`
4612 * Called when a player is right-clicked
4613 * `player`: ObjectRef - Player that was right-clicked
4614 * `clicker`: ObjectRef - Object that right-clicked, may or may not be a player
4615 * `minetest.register_on_player_hpchange(function(player, hp_change, reason), modifier)`
4616 * Called when the player gets damaged or healed
4617 * `player`: ObjectRef of the player
4618 * `hp_change`: the amount of change. Negative when it is damage.
4619 * `reason`: a PlayerHPChangeReason table.
4620 * The `type` field will have one of the following values:
4621 * `set_hp`: A mod or the engine called `set_hp` without
4622 giving a type - use this for custom damage types.
4623 * `punch`: Was punched. `reason.object` will hold the puncher, or nil if none.
4625 * `node_damage`: `damage_per_second` from a neighbouring node.
4626 `reason.node` will hold the node name or nil.
4629 * Any of the above types may have additional fields from mods.
4630 * `reason.from` will be `mod` or `engine`.
4631 * `modifier`: when true, the function should return the actual `hp_change`.
4632 Note: modifiers only get a temporary `hp_change` that can be modified by later modifiers.
4633 Modifiers can return true as a second argument to stop the execution of further functions.
4634 Non-modifiers receive the final HP change calculated by the modifiers.
4635 * `minetest.register_on_dieplayer(function(ObjectRef, reason))`
4636 * Called when a player dies
4637 * `reason`: a PlayerHPChangeReason table, see register_on_player_hpchange
4638 * `minetest.register_on_respawnplayer(function(ObjectRef))`
4639 * Called when player is to be respawned
4640 * Called _before_ repositioning of player occurs
4641 * return true in func to disable regular player placement
4642 * `minetest.register_on_prejoinplayer(function(name, ip))`
4643 * Called when a client connects to the server, prior to authentication
4644 * If it returns a string, the client is disconnected with that string as
4646 * `minetest.register_on_joinplayer(function(ObjectRef, last_login))`
4647 * Called when a player joins the game
4648 * `last_login`: The timestamp of the previous login, or nil if player is new
4649 * `minetest.register_on_leaveplayer(function(ObjectRef, timed_out))`
4650 * Called when a player leaves the game
4651 * `timed_out`: True for timeout, false for other reasons.
4652 * `minetest.register_on_authplayer(function(name, ip, is_success))`
4653 * Called when a client attempts to log into an account.
4654 * `name`: The name of the account being authenticated.
4655 * `ip`: The IP address of the client
4656 * `is_success`: Whether the client was successfully authenticated
4657 * For newly registered accounts, `is_success` will always be true
4658 * `minetest.register_on_auth_fail(function(name, ip))`
4659 * Deprecated: use `minetest.register_on_authplayer(name, ip, is_success)` instead.
4660 * `minetest.register_on_cheat(function(ObjectRef, cheat))`
4661 * Called when a player cheats
4662 * `cheat`: `{type=<cheat_type>}`, where `<cheat_type>` is one of:
4664 * `interacted_too_far`
4665 * `interacted_with_self`
4666 * `interacted_while_dead`
4667 * `finished_unknown_dig`
4670 * `minetest.register_on_chat_message(function(name, message))`
4671 * Called always when a player says something
4672 * Return `true` to mark the message as handled, which means that it will
4673 not be sent to other players.
4674 * `minetest.register_on_chatcommand(function(name, command, params))`
4675 * Called always when a chatcommand is triggered, before `minetest.registered_chatcommands`
4676 is checked to see if the command exists, but after the input is parsed.
4677 * Return `true` to mark the command as handled, which means that the default
4678 handlers will be prevented.
4679 * `minetest.register_on_player_receive_fields(function(player, formname, fields))`
4680 * Called when the server received input from `player` in a formspec with
4681 the given `formname`. Specifically, this is called on any of the
4683 * a button was pressed,
4684 * Enter was pressed while the focus was on a text field
4685 * a checkbox was toggled,
4686 * something was selected in a dropdown list,
4687 * a different tab was selected,
4688 * selection was changed in a textlist or table,
4689 * an entry was double-clicked in a textlist or table,
4690 * a scrollbar was moved, or
4691 * the form was actively closed by the player.
4692 * Fields are sent for formspec elements which define a field. `fields`
4693 is a table containing each formspecs element value (as string), with
4694 the `name` parameter as index for each. The value depends on the
4695 formspec element type:
4696 * `animated_image`: Returns the index of the current frame.
4697 * `button` and variants: If pressed, contains the user-facing button
4698 text as value. If not pressed, is `nil`
4699 * `field`, `textarea` and variants: Text in the field
4700 * `dropdown`: Either the index or value, depending on the `index event`
4702 * `tabheader`: Tab index, starting with `"1"` (only if tab changed)
4703 * `checkbox`: `"true"` if checked, `"false"` if unchecked
4704 * `textlist`: See `minetest.explode_textlist_event`
4705 * `table`: See `minetest.explode_table_event`
4706 * `scrollbar`: See `minetest.explode_scrollbar_event`
4707 * Special case: `["quit"]="true"` is sent when the user actively
4708 closed the form by mouse click, keypress or through a button_exit[]
4710 * Special case: `["key_enter"]="true"` is sent when the user pressed
4711 the Enter key and the focus was either nowhere (causing the formspec
4712 to be closed) or on a button. If the focus was on a text field,
4713 additionally, the index `key_enter_field` contains the name of the
4714 text field. See also: `field_close_on_enter`.
4715 * Newest functions are called first
4716 * If function returns `true`, remaining functions are not called
4717 * `minetest.register_on_craft(function(itemstack, player, old_craft_grid, craft_inv))`
4718 * Called when `player` crafts something
4719 * `itemstack` is the output
4720 * `old_craft_grid` contains the recipe (Note: the one in the inventory is
4722 * `craft_inv` is the inventory with the crafting grid
4723 * Return either an `ItemStack`, to replace the output, or `nil`, to not
4725 * `minetest.register_craft_predict(function(itemstack, player, old_craft_grid, craft_inv))`
4726 * The same as before, except that it is called before the player crafts, to
4727 make craft prediction, and it should not change anything.
4728 * `minetest.register_allow_player_inventory_action(function(player, action, inventory, inventory_info))`
4729 * Determines how much of a stack may be taken, put or moved to a
4731 * `player` (type `ObjectRef`) is the player who modified the inventory
4732 `inventory` (type `InvRef`).
4733 * List of possible `action` (string) values and their
4734 `inventory_info` (table) contents:
4735 * `move`: `{from_list=string, to_list=string, from_index=number, to_index=number, count=number}`
4736 * `put`: `{listname=string, index=number, stack=ItemStack}`
4737 * `take`: Same as `put`
4738 * Return a numeric value to limit the amount of items to be taken, put or
4739 moved. A value of `-1` for `take` will make the source stack infinite.
4740 * `minetest.register_on_player_inventory_action(function(player, action, inventory, inventory_info))`
4741 * Called after a take, put or move event from/to/in a player inventory
4742 * Function arguments: see `minetest.register_allow_player_inventory_action`
4743 * Does not accept or handle any return value.
4744 * `minetest.register_on_protection_violation(function(pos, name))`
4745 * Called by `builtin` and mods when a player violates protection at a
4746 position (eg, digs a node or punches a protected entity).
4747 * The registered functions can be called using
4748 `minetest.record_protection_violation`.
4749 * The provided function should check that the position is protected by the
4750 mod calling this function before it prints a message, if it does, to
4751 allow for multiple protection mods.
4752 * `minetest.register_on_item_eat(function(hp_change, replace_with_item, itemstack, user, pointed_thing))`
4753 * Called when an item is eaten, by `minetest.item_eat`
4754 * Return `itemstack` to cancel the default item eat response (i.e.: hp increase).
4755 * `minetest.register_on_priv_grant(function(name, granter, priv))`
4756 * Called when `granter` grants the priv `priv` to `name`.
4757 * Note that the callback will be called twice if it's done by a player,
4758 once with granter being the player name, and again with granter being nil.
4759 * `minetest.register_on_priv_revoke(function(name, revoker, priv))`
4760 * Called when `revoker` revokes the priv `priv` from `name`.
4761 * Note that the callback will be called twice if it's done by a player,
4762 once with revoker being the player name, and again with revoker being nil.
4763 * `minetest.register_can_bypass_userlimit(function(name, ip))`
4764 * Called when `name` user connects with `ip`.
4765 * Return `true` to by pass the player limit
4766 * `minetest.register_on_modchannel_message(function(channel_name, sender, message))`
4767 * Called when an incoming mod channel message is received
4768 * You should have joined some channels to receive events.
4769 * If message comes from a server mod, `sender` field is an empty string.
4774 * `minetest.settings`: Settings object containing all of the settings from the
4775 main config file (`minetest.conf`).
4776 * `minetest.setting_get_pos(name)`: Loads a setting from the main settings and
4777 parses it as a position (in the format `(1,2,3)`). Returns a position or nil.
4782 * `minetest.string_to_privs(str[, delim])`:
4783 * Converts string representation of privs into table form
4784 * `delim`: String separating the privs. Defaults to `","`.
4785 * Returns `{ priv1 = true, ... }`
4786 * `minetest.privs_to_string(privs[, delim])`:
4787 * Returns the string representation of `privs`
4788 * `delim`: String to delimit privs. Defaults to `","`.
4789 * `minetest.get_player_privs(name) -> {priv1=true,...}`
4790 * `minetest.check_player_privs(player_or_name, ...)`:
4791 returns `bool, missing_privs`
4792 * A quickhand for checking privileges.
4793 * `player_or_name`: Either a Player object or the name of a player.
4794 * `...` is either a list of strings, e.g. `"priva", "privb"` or
4795 a table, e.g. `{ priva = true, privb = true }`.
4797 * `minetest.check_password_entry(name, entry, password)`
4798 * Returns true if the "password entry" for a player with name matches given
4799 password, false otherwise.
4800 * The "password entry" is the password representation generated by the
4801 engine as returned as part of a `get_auth()` call on the auth handler.
4802 * Only use this function for making it possible to log in via password from
4803 external protocols such as IRC, other uses are frowned upon.
4804 * `minetest.get_password_hash(name, raw_password)`
4805 * Convert a name-password pair to a password hash that Minetest can use.
4806 * The returned value alone is not a good basis for password checks based
4807 on comparing the password hash in the database with the password hash
4808 from the function, with an externally provided password, as the hash
4809 in the db might use the new SRP verifier format.
4810 * For this purpose, use `minetest.check_password_entry` instead.
4811 * `minetest.get_player_ip(name)`: returns an IP address string for the player
4813 * The player needs to be online for this to be successful.
4815 * `minetest.get_auth_handler()`: Return the currently active auth handler
4816 * See the [Authentication handler definition]
4817 * Use this to e.g. get the authentication data for a player:
4818 `local auth_data = minetest.get_auth_handler().get_auth(playername)`
4819 * `minetest.notify_authentication_modified(name)`
4820 * Must be called by the authentication handler for privilege changes.
4821 * `name`: string; if omitted, all auth data should be considered modified
4822 * `minetest.set_player_password(name, password_hash)`: Set password hash of
4824 * `minetest.set_player_privs(name, {priv1=true,...})`: Set privileges of player
4826 * `minetest.auth_reload()`
4827 * See `reload()` in authentication handler definition
4829 `minetest.set_player_password`, `minetest.set_player_privs`,
4830 `minetest.get_player_privs` and `minetest.auth_reload` call the authentication
4836 * `minetest.chat_send_all(text)`
4837 * `minetest.chat_send_player(name, text)`
4838 * `minetest.format_chat_message(name, message)`
4839 * Used by the server to format a chat message, based on the setting `chat_message_format`.
4840 Refer to the documentation of the setting for a list of valid placeholders.
4841 * Takes player name and message, and returns the formatted string to be sent to players.
4842 * Can be redefined by mods if required, for things like colored names or messages.
4843 * **Only** the first occurrence of each placeholder will be replaced.
4848 * `minetest.set_node(pos, node)`
4849 * `minetest.add_node(pos, node)`: alias to `minetest.set_node`
4850 * Set node at position `pos`
4851 * `node`: table `{name=string, param1=number, param2=number}`
4852 * If param1 or param2 is omitted, it's set to `0`.
4853 * e.g. `minetest.set_node({x=0, y=10, z=0}, {name="default:wood"})`
4854 * `minetest.bulk_set_node({pos1, pos2, pos3, ...}, node)`
4855 * Set node on all positions set in the first argument.
4856 * e.g. `minetest.bulk_set_node({{x=0, y=1, z=1}, {x=1, y=2, z=2}}, {name="default:stone"})`
4857 * For node specification or position syntax see `minetest.set_node` call
4858 * Faster than set_node due to single call, but still considerably slower
4859 than Lua Voxel Manipulators (LVM) for large numbers of nodes.
4860 Unlike LVMs, this will call node callbacks. It also allows setting nodes
4861 in spread out positions which would cause LVMs to waste memory.
4862 For setting a cube, this is 1.3x faster than set_node whereas LVM is 20
4864 * `minetest.swap_node(pos, node)`
4865 * Set node at position, but don't remove metadata
4866 * `minetest.remove_node(pos)`
4867 * By default it does the same as `minetest.set_node(pos, {name="air"})`
4868 * `minetest.get_node(pos)`
4869 * Returns the node at the given position as table in the format
4870 `{name="node_name", param1=0, param2=0}`,
4871 returns `{name="ignore", param1=0, param2=0}` for unloaded areas.
4872 * `minetest.get_node_or_nil(pos)`
4873 * Same as `get_node` but returns `nil` for unloaded areas.
4874 * `minetest.get_node_light(pos, timeofday)`
4875 * Gets the light value at the given position. Note that the light value
4876 "inside" the node at the given position is returned, so you usually want
4877 to get the light value of a neighbor.
4878 * `pos`: The position where to measure the light.
4879 * `timeofday`: `nil` for current time, `0` for night, `0.5` for day
4880 * Returns a number between `0` and `15` or `nil`
4881 * `nil` is returned e.g. when the map isn't loaded at `pos`
4882 * `minetest.get_natural_light(pos[, timeofday])`
4883 * Figures out the sunlight (or moonlight) value at pos at the given time of
4885 * `pos`: The position of the node
4886 * `timeofday`: `nil` for current time, `0` for night, `0.5` for day
4887 * Returns a number between `0` and `15` or `nil`
4888 * This function tests 203 nodes in the worst case, which happens very
4890 * `minetest.get_artificial_light(param1)`
4891 * Calculates the artificial light (light from e.g. torches) value from the
4893 * `param1`: The param1 value of a `paramtype = "light"` node.
4894 * Returns a number between `0` and `15`
4895 * Currently it's the same as `math.floor(param1 / 16)`, except that it
4896 ensures compatibility.
4897 * `minetest.place_node(pos, node)`
4898 * Place node with the same effects that a player would cause
4899 * `minetest.dig_node(pos)`
4900 * Dig node with the same effects that a player would cause
4901 * Returns `true` if successful, `false` on failure (e.g. protected location)
4902 * `minetest.punch_node(pos)`
4903 * Punch node with the same effects that a player would cause
4904 * `minetest.spawn_falling_node(pos)`
4905 * Change node into falling node
4906 * Returns `true` if successful, `false` on failure
4908 * `minetest.find_nodes_with_meta(pos1, pos2)`
4909 * Get a table of positions of nodes that have metadata within a region
4911 * `minetest.get_meta(pos)`
4912 * Get a `NodeMetaRef` at that position
4913 * `minetest.get_node_timer(pos)`
4914 * Get `NodeTimerRef`
4916 * `minetest.add_entity(pos, name, [staticdata])`: Spawn Lua-defined entity at
4918 * Returns `ObjectRef`, or `nil` if failed
4919 * `minetest.add_item(pos, item)`: Spawn item
4920 * Returns `ObjectRef`, or `nil` if failed
4921 * `minetest.get_player_by_name(name)`: Get an `ObjectRef` to a player
4922 * `minetest.get_objects_inside_radius(pos, radius)`: returns a list of
4924 * `radius`: using an euclidean metric
4925 * `minetest.get_objects_in_area(pos1, pos2)`: returns a list of
4927 * `pos1` and `pos2` are the min and max positions of the area to search.
4928 * `minetest.set_timeofday(val)`
4929 * `val` is between `0` and `1`; `0` for midnight, `0.5` for midday
4930 * `minetest.get_timeofday()`
4931 * `minetest.get_gametime()`: returns the time, in seconds, since the world was
4933 * `minetest.get_day_count()`: returns number days elapsed since world was
4935 * accounts for time changes.
4936 * `minetest.find_node_near(pos, radius, nodenames, [search_center])`: returns
4938 * `radius`: using a maximum metric
4939 * `nodenames`: e.g. `{"ignore", "group:tree"}` or `"default:dirt"`
4940 * `search_center` is an optional boolean (default: `false`)
4941 If true `pos` is also checked for the nodes
4942 * `minetest.find_nodes_in_area(pos1, pos2, nodenames, [grouped])`
4943 * `pos1` and `pos2` are the min and max positions of the area to search.
4944 * `nodenames`: e.g. `{"ignore", "group:tree"}` or `"default:dirt"`
4945 * If `grouped` is true the return value is a table indexed by node name
4946 which contains lists of positions.
4947 * If `grouped` is false or absent the return values are as follows:
4948 first value: Table with all node positions
4949 second value: Table with the count of each node with the node name
4951 * Area volume is limited to 4,096,000 nodes
4952 * `minetest.find_nodes_in_area_under_air(pos1, pos2, nodenames)`: returns a
4954 * `nodenames`: e.g. `{"ignore", "group:tree"}` or `"default:dirt"`
4955 * Return value: Table with all node positions with a node air above
4956 * Area volume is limited to 4,096,000 nodes
4957 * `minetest.get_perlin(noiseparams)`
4958 * Return world-specific perlin noise.
4959 * The actual seed used is the noiseparams seed plus the world seed.
4960 * `minetest.get_perlin(seeddiff, octaves, persistence, spread)`
4961 * Deprecated: use `minetest.get_perlin(noiseparams)` instead.
4962 * Return world-specific perlin noise.
4963 * `minetest.get_voxel_manip([pos1, pos2])`
4964 * Return voxel manipulator object.
4965 * Loads the manipulator from the map if positions are passed.
4966 * `minetest.set_gen_notify(flags, {deco_ids})`
4967 * Set the types of on-generate notifications that should be collected.
4968 * `flags` is a flag field with the available flags:
4976 * The second parameter is a list of IDs of decorations which notification
4978 * `minetest.get_gen_notify()`
4979 * Returns a flagstring and a table with the `deco_id`s.
4980 * `minetest.get_decoration_id(decoration_name)`
4981 * Returns the decoration ID number for the provided decoration name string,
4982 or `nil` on failure.
4983 * `minetest.get_mapgen_object(objectname)`
4984 * Return requested mapgen object if available (see [Mapgen objects])
4985 * `minetest.get_heat(pos)`
4986 * Returns the heat at the position, or `nil` on failure.
4987 * `minetest.get_humidity(pos)`
4988 * Returns the humidity at the position, or `nil` on failure.
4989 * `minetest.get_biome_data(pos)`
4990 * Returns a table containing:
4991 * `biome` the biome id of the biome at that position
4992 * `heat` the heat at the position
4993 * `humidity` the humidity at the position
4994 * Or returns `nil` on failure.
4995 * `minetest.get_biome_id(biome_name)`
4996 * Returns the biome id, as used in the biomemap Mapgen object and returned
4997 by `minetest.get_biome_data(pos)`, for a given biome_name string.
4998 * `minetest.get_biome_name(biome_id)`
4999 * Returns the biome name string for the provided biome id, or `nil` on
5001 * If no biomes have been registered, such as in mgv6, returns `default`.
5002 * `minetest.get_mapgen_params()`
5003 * Deprecated: use `minetest.get_mapgen_setting(name)` instead.
5004 * Returns a table containing:
5010 * `minetest.set_mapgen_params(MapgenParams)`
5011 * Deprecated: use `minetest.set_mapgen_setting(name, value, override)`
5013 * Set map generation parameters.
5014 * Function cannot be called after the registration period; only
5015 initialization and `on_mapgen_init`.
5016 * Takes a table as an argument with the fields:
5022 * Leave field unset to leave that parameter unchanged.
5023 * `flags` contains a comma-delimited string of flags to set, or if the
5024 prefix `"no"` is attached, clears instead.
5025 * `flags` is in the same format and has the same options as `mg_flags` in
5027 * `minetest.get_mapgen_setting(name)`
5028 * Gets the *active* mapgen setting (or nil if none exists) in string
5029 format with the following order of precedence:
5030 1) Settings loaded from map_meta.txt or overrides set during mod
5032 2) Settings set by mods without a metafile override
5033 3) Settings explicitly set in the user config file, minetest.conf
5034 4) Settings set as the user config default
5035 * `minetest.get_mapgen_setting_noiseparams(name)`
5036 * Same as above, but returns the value as a NoiseParams table if the
5037 setting `name` exists and is a valid NoiseParams.
5038 * `minetest.set_mapgen_setting(name, value, [override_meta])`
5039 * Sets a mapgen param to `value`, and will take effect if the corresponding
5040 mapgen setting is not already present in map_meta.txt.
5041 * `override_meta` is an optional boolean (default: `false`). If this is set
5042 to true, the setting will become the active setting regardless of the map
5044 * Note: to set the seed, use `"seed"`, not `"fixed_map_seed"`.
5045 * `minetest.set_mapgen_setting_noiseparams(name, value, [override_meta])`
5046 * Same as above, except value is a NoiseParams table.
5047 * `minetest.set_noiseparams(name, noiseparams, set_default)`
5048 * Sets the noiseparams setting of `name` to the noiseparams table specified
5050 * `set_default` is an optional boolean (default: `true`) that specifies
5051 whether the setting should be applied to the default config or current
5053 * `minetest.get_noiseparams(name)`
5054 * Returns a table of the noiseparams for name.
5055 * `minetest.generate_ores(vm, pos1, pos2)`
5056 * Generate all registered ores within the VoxelManip `vm` and in the area
5057 from `pos1` to `pos2`.
5058 * `pos1` and `pos2` are optional and default to mapchunk minp and maxp.
5059 * `minetest.generate_decorations(vm, pos1, pos2)`
5060 * Generate all registered decorations within the VoxelManip `vm` and in the
5061 area from `pos1` to `pos2`.
5062 * `pos1` and `pos2` are optional and default to mapchunk minp and maxp.
5063 * `minetest.clear_objects([options])`
5064 * Clear all objects in the environment
5065 * Takes an optional table as an argument with the field `mode`.
5066 * mode = `"full"` : Load and go through every mapblock, clearing
5068 * mode = `"quick"`: Clear objects immediately in loaded mapblocks,
5069 clear objects in unloaded mapblocks only when the
5070 mapblocks are next activated.
5071 * `minetest.load_area(pos1[, pos2])`
5072 * Load the mapblocks containing the area from `pos1` to `pos2`.
5073 `pos2` defaults to `pos1` if not specified.
5074 * This function does not trigger map generation.
5075 * `minetest.emerge_area(pos1, pos2, [callback], [param])`
5076 * Queue all blocks in the area from `pos1` to `pos2`, inclusive, to be
5077 asynchronously fetched from memory, loaded from disk, or if inexistent,
5079 * If `callback` is a valid Lua function, this will be called for each block
5081 * The function signature of callback is:
5082 `function EmergeAreaCallback(blockpos, action, calls_remaining, param)`
5083 * `blockpos` is the *block* coordinates of the block that had been
5085 * `action` could be one of the following constant values:
5086 * `minetest.EMERGE_CANCELLED`
5087 * `minetest.EMERGE_ERRORED`
5088 * `minetest.EMERGE_FROM_MEMORY`
5089 * `minetest.EMERGE_FROM_DISK`
5090 * `minetest.EMERGE_GENERATED`
5091 * `calls_remaining` is the number of callbacks to be expected after
5093 * `param` is the user-defined parameter passed to emerge_area (or
5094 nil if the parameter was absent).
5095 * `minetest.delete_area(pos1, pos2)`
5096 * delete all mapblocks in the area from pos1 to pos2, inclusive
5097 * `minetest.line_of_sight(pos1, pos2)`: returns `boolean, pos`
5098 * Checks if there is anything other than air between pos1 and pos2.
5099 * Returns false if something is blocking the sight.
5100 * Returns the position of the blocking node when `false`
5101 * `pos1`: First position
5102 * `pos2`: Second position
5103 * `minetest.raycast(pos1, pos2, objects, liquids)`: returns `Raycast`
5104 * Creates a `Raycast` object.
5105 * `pos1`: start of the ray
5106 * `pos2`: end of the ray
5107 * `objects`: if false, only nodes will be returned. Default is `true`.
5108 * `liquids`: if false, liquid nodes won't be returned. Default is `false`.
5109 * `minetest.find_path(pos1,pos2,searchdistance,max_jump,max_drop,algorithm)`
5110 * returns table containing path that can be walked on
5111 * returns a table of 3D points representing a path from `pos1` to `pos2` or
5113 * Reasons for failure:
5114 * No path exists at all
5115 * No path exists within `searchdistance` (see below)
5116 * Start or end pos is buried in land
5117 * `pos1`: start position
5118 * `pos2`: end position
5119 * `searchdistance`: maximum distance from the search positions to search in.
5120 In detail: Path must be completely inside a cuboid. The minimum
5121 `searchdistance` of 1 will confine search between `pos1` and `pos2`.
5122 Larger values will increase the size of this cuboid in all directions
5123 * `max_jump`: maximum height difference to consider walkable
5124 * `max_drop`: maximum height difference to consider droppable
5125 * `algorithm`: One of `"A*_noprefetch"` (default), `"A*"`, `"Dijkstra"`.
5126 Difference between `"A*"` and `"A*_noprefetch"` is that
5127 `"A*"` will pre-calculate the cost-data, the other will calculate it
5129 * `minetest.spawn_tree (pos, {treedef})`
5130 * spawns L-system tree at given `pos` with definition in `treedef` table
5131 * `minetest.transforming_liquid_add(pos)`
5132 * add node to liquid update queue
5133 * `minetest.get_node_max_level(pos)`
5134 * get max available level for leveled node
5135 * `minetest.get_node_level(pos)`
5136 * get level of leveled node (water, snow)
5137 * `minetest.set_node_level(pos, level)`
5138 * set level of leveled node, default `level` equals `1`
5139 * if `totallevel > maxlevel`, returns rest (`total-max`).
5140 * `minetest.add_node_level(pos, level)`
5141 * increase level of leveled node by level, default `level` equals `1`
5142 * if `totallevel > maxlevel`, returns rest (`total-max`)
5143 * `level` must be between -127 and 127
5144 * `minetest.fix_light(pos1, pos2)`: returns `true`/`false`
5145 * resets the light in a cuboid-shaped part of
5146 the map and removes lighting bugs.
5147 * Loads the area if it is not loaded.
5148 * `pos1` is the corner of the cuboid with the least coordinates
5149 (in node coordinates), inclusive.
5150 * `pos2` is the opposite corner of the cuboid, inclusive.
5151 * The actual updated cuboid might be larger than the specified one,
5152 because only whole map blocks can be updated.
5153 The actual updated area consists of those map blocks that intersect
5154 with the given cuboid.
5155 * However, the neighborhood of the updated area might change
5156 as well, as light can spread out of the cuboid, also light
5158 * returns `false` if the area is not fully generated,
5160 * `minetest.check_single_for_falling(pos)`
5161 * causes an unsupported `group:falling_node` node to fall and causes an
5162 unattached `group:attached_node` node to fall.
5163 * does not spread these updates to neighbours.
5164 * `minetest.check_for_falling(pos)`
5165 * causes an unsupported `group:falling_node` node to fall and causes an
5166 unattached `group:attached_node` node to fall.
5167 * spread these updates to neighbours and can cause a cascade
5169 * `minetest.get_spawn_level(x, z)`
5170 * Returns a player spawn y co-ordinate for the provided (x, z)
5171 co-ordinates, or `nil` for an unsuitable spawn point.
5172 * For most mapgens a 'suitable spawn point' is one with y between
5173 `water_level` and `water_level + 16`, and in mgv7 well away from rivers,
5174 so `nil` will be returned for many (x, z) co-ordinates.
5175 * The spawn level returned is for a player spawn in unmodified terrain.
5176 * The spawn level is intentionally above terrain level to cope with
5177 full-node biome 'dust' nodes.
5182 You can find mod channels communication scheme in `doc/mod_channels.png`.
5184 * `minetest.mod_channel_join(channel_name)`
5185 * Server joins channel `channel_name`, and creates it if necessary. You
5186 should listen for incoming messages with
5187 `minetest.register_on_modchannel_message`
5192 `minetest.get_inventory(location)`: returns an `InvRef`
5195 * `{type="player", name="celeron55"}`
5196 * `{type="node", pos={x=, y=, z=}}`
5197 * `{type="detached", name="creative"}`
5198 * `minetest.create_detached_inventory(name, callbacks, [player_name])`: returns
5200 * `callbacks`: See [Detached inventory callbacks]
5201 * `player_name`: Make detached inventory available to one player
5202 exclusively, by default they will be sent to every player (even if not
5204 Note that this parameter is mostly just a workaround and will be removed
5206 * Creates a detached inventory. If it already exists, it is cleared.
5207 * `minetest.remove_detached_inventory(name)`
5208 * Returns a `boolean` indicating whether the removal succeeded.
5209 * `minetest.do_item_eat(hp_change, replace_with_item, itemstack, user, pointed_thing)`:
5210 returns left over ItemStack.
5211 * See `minetest.item_eat` and `minetest.register_on_item_eat`
5216 * `minetest.show_formspec(playername, formname, formspec)`
5217 * `playername`: name of player to show formspec
5218 * `formname`: name passed to `on_player_receive_fields` callbacks.
5219 It should follow the `"modname:<whatever>"` naming convention
5220 * `formspec`: formspec to display
5221 * `minetest.close_formspec(playername, formname)`
5222 * `playername`: name of player to close formspec
5223 * `formname`: has to exactly match the one given in `show_formspec`, or the
5224 formspec will not close.
5225 * calling `show_formspec(playername, formname, "")` is equal to this
5227 * to close a formspec regardless of the formname, call
5228 `minetest.close_formspec(playername, "")`.
5229 **USE THIS ONLY WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY!**
5230 * `minetest.formspec_escape(string)`: returns a string
5231 * escapes the characters "[", "]", "\", "," and ";", which can not be used
5233 * `minetest.explode_table_event(string)`: returns a table
5234 * returns e.g. `{type="CHG", row=1, column=2}`
5236 * `"INV"`: no row selected
5238 * `"DCL"`: double-click
5239 * `minetest.explode_textlist_event(string)`: returns a table
5240 * returns e.g. `{type="CHG", index=1}`
5242 * `"INV"`: no row selected
5244 * `"DCL"`: double-click
5245 * `minetest.explode_scrollbar_event(string)`: returns a table
5246 * returns e.g. `{type="CHG", value=500}`
5248 * `"INV"`: something failed
5249 * `"CHG"`: has been changed
5250 * `"VAL"`: not changed
5255 * `minetest.inventorycube(img1, img2, img3)`
5256 * Returns a string for making an image of a cube (useful as an item image)
5257 * `minetest.get_pointed_thing_position(pointed_thing, above)`
5258 * Returns the position of a `pointed_thing` or `nil` if the `pointed_thing`
5259 does not refer to a node or entity.
5260 * If the optional `above` parameter is true and the `pointed_thing` refers
5261 to a node, then it will return the `above` position of the `pointed_thing`.
5262 * `minetest.dir_to_facedir(dir, is6d)`
5263 * Convert a vector to a facedir value, used in `param2` for
5264 `paramtype2="facedir"`.
5265 * passing something non-`nil`/`false` for the optional second parameter
5266 causes it to take the y component into account.
5267 * `minetest.facedir_to_dir(facedir)`
5268 * Convert a facedir back into a vector aimed directly out the "back" of a
5270 * `minetest.dir_to_wallmounted(dir)`
5271 * Convert a vector to a wallmounted value, used for
5272 `paramtype2="wallmounted"`.
5273 * `minetest.wallmounted_to_dir(wallmounted)`
5274 * Convert a wallmounted value back into a vector aimed directly out the
5276 * `minetest.dir_to_yaw(dir)`
5277 * Convert a vector into a yaw (angle)
5278 * `minetest.yaw_to_dir(yaw)`
5279 * Convert yaw (angle) to a vector
5280 * `minetest.is_colored_paramtype(ptype)`
5281 * Returns a boolean. Returns `true` if the given `paramtype2` contains
5282 color information (`color`, `colorwallmounted` or `colorfacedir`).
5283 * `minetest.strip_param2_color(param2, paramtype2)`
5284 * Removes everything but the color information from the
5285 given `param2` value.
5286 * Returns `nil` if the given `paramtype2` does not contain color
5288 * `minetest.get_node_drops(node, toolname)`
5289 * Returns list of itemstrings that are dropped by `node` when dug
5291 * `node`: node as table or node name
5292 * `toolname`: name of the tool item (can be `nil`)
5293 * `minetest.get_craft_result(input)`: returns `output, decremented_input`
5294 * `input.method` = `"normal"` or `"cooking"` or `"fuel"`
5295 * `input.width` = for example `3`
5296 * `input.items` = for example
5297 `{stack1, stack2, stack3, stack4, stack 5, stack 6, stack 7, stack 8, stack 9}`
5298 * `output.item` = `ItemStack`, if unsuccessful: empty `ItemStack`
5299 * `output.time` = a number, if unsuccessful: `0`
5300 * `output.replacements` = List of replacement `ItemStack`s that couldn't be
5301 placed in `decremented_input.items`. Replacements can be placed in
5302 `decremented_input` if the stack of the replaced item has a count of 1.
5303 * `decremented_input` = like `input`
5304 * `minetest.get_craft_recipe(output)`: returns input
5305 * returns last registered recipe for output item (node)
5306 * `output` is a node or item type such as `"default:torch"`
5307 * `input.method` = `"normal"` or `"cooking"` or `"fuel"`
5308 * `input.width` = for example `3`
5309 * `input.items` = for example
5310 `{stack1, stack2, stack3, stack4, stack 5, stack 6, stack 7, stack 8, stack 9}`
5311 * `input.items` = `nil` if no recipe found
5312 * `minetest.get_all_craft_recipes(query item)`: returns a table or `nil`
5313 * returns indexed table with all registered recipes for query item (node)
5314 or `nil` if no recipe was found.
5315 * recipe entry table:
5316 * `method`: 'normal' or 'cooking' or 'fuel'
5317 * `width`: 0-3, 0 means shapeless recipe
5318 * `items`: indexed [1-9] table with recipe items
5319 * `output`: string with item name and quantity
5320 * Example query for `"default:gold_ingot"` will return table:
5323 [1]={method = "cooking", width = 3, output = "default:gold_ingot",
5324 items = {1 = "default:gold_lump"}},
5325 [2]={method = "normal", width = 1, output = "default:gold_ingot 9",
5326 items = {1 = "default:goldblock"}}
5328 * `minetest.handle_node_drops(pos, drops, digger)`
5329 * `drops`: list of itemstrings
5330 * Handles drops from nodes after digging: Default action is to put them
5331 into digger's inventory.
5332 * Can be overridden to get different functionality (e.g. dropping items on
5334 * `minetest.itemstring_with_palette(item, palette_index)`: returns an item
5336 * Creates an item string which contains palette index information
5337 for hardware colorization. You can use the returned string
5338 as an output in a craft recipe.
5339 * `item`: the item stack which becomes colored. Can be in string,
5340 table and native form.
5341 * `palette_index`: this index is added to the item stack
5342 * `minetest.itemstring_with_color(item, colorstring)`: returns an item string
5343 * Creates an item string which contains static color information
5344 for hardware colorization. Use this method if you wish to colorize
5345 an item that does not own a palette. You can use the returned string
5346 as an output in a craft recipe.
5347 * `item`: the item stack which becomes colored. Can be in string,
5348 table and native form.
5349 * `colorstring`: the new color of the item stack
5354 * `minetest.rollback_get_node_actions(pos, range, seconds, limit)`:
5355 returns `{{actor, pos, time, oldnode, newnode}, ...}`
5356 * Find who has done something to a node, or near a node
5357 * `actor`: `"player:<name>"`, also `"liquid"`.
5358 * `minetest.rollback_revert_actions_by(actor, seconds)`: returns
5359 `boolean, log_messages`.
5360 * Revert latest actions of someone
5361 * `actor`: `"player:<name>"`, also `"liquid"`.
5363 Defaults for the `on_place` and `on_drop` item definition functions
5364 -------------------------------------------------------------------
5366 * `minetest.item_place_node(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing[, param2, prevent_after_place])`
5367 * Place item as a node
5368 * `param2` overrides `facedir` and wallmounted `param2`
5369 * `prevent_after_place`: if set to `true`, `after_place_node` is not called
5370 for the newly placed node to prevent a callback and placement loop
5371 * returns `itemstack, position`
5372 * `position`: the location the node was placed to. `nil` if nothing was placed.
5373 * `minetest.item_place_object(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing)`
5375 * returns the leftover itemstack
5376 * **Note**: This function is deprecated and will never be called.
5377 * `minetest.item_place(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing[, param2])`
5378 * Wrapper that calls `minetest.item_place_node` if appropriate
5379 * Calls `on_rightclick` of `pointed_thing.under` if defined instead
5380 * **Note**: is not called when wielded item overrides `on_place`
5381 * `param2` overrides facedir and wallmounted `param2`
5382 * returns `itemstack, position`
5383 * `position`: the location the node was placed to. `nil` if nothing was placed.
5384 * `minetest.item_drop(itemstack, dropper, pos)`
5386 * returns the leftover itemstack
5387 * `minetest.item_eat(hp_change[, replace_with_item])`
5388 * Returns `function(itemstack, user, pointed_thing)` as a
5389 function wrapper for `minetest.do_item_eat`.
5390 * `replace_with_item` is the itemstring which is added to the inventory.
5391 If the player is eating a stack, then replace_with_item goes to a
5394 Defaults for the `on_punch` and `on_dig` node definition callbacks
5395 ------------------------------------------------------------------
5397 * `minetest.node_punch(pos, node, puncher, pointed_thing)`
5398 * Calls functions registered by `minetest.register_on_punchnode()`
5399 * `minetest.node_dig(pos, node, digger)`
5400 * Checks if node can be dug, puts item into inventory, removes node
5401 * Calls functions registered by `minetest.registered_on_dignodes()`
5406 * `minetest.sound_play(spec, parameters, [ephemeral])`: returns a handle
5407 * `spec` is a `SimpleSoundSpec`
5408 * `parameters` is a sound parameter table
5409 * `ephemeral` is a boolean (default: false)
5410 Ephemeral sounds will not return a handle and can't be stopped or faded.
5411 It is recommend to use this for short sounds that happen in response to
5412 player actions (e.g. door closing).
5413 * `minetest.sound_stop(handle)`
5414 * `handle` is a handle returned by `minetest.sound_play`
5415 * `minetest.sound_fade(handle, step, gain)`
5416 * `handle` is a handle returned by `minetest.sound_play`
5417 * `step` determines how fast a sound will fade.
5418 The gain will change by this much per second,
5419 until it reaches the target gain.
5420 Note: Older versions used a signed step. This is deprecated, but old
5421 code will still work. (the client uses abs(step) to correct it)
5422 * `gain` the target gain for the fade.
5423 Fading to zero will delete the sound.
5428 * `minetest.after(time, func, ...)` : returns job table to use as below.
5429 * Call the function `func` after `time` seconds, may be fractional
5430 * Optional: Variable number of arguments that are passed to `func`
5433 * Cancels the job function from being called
5438 * `minetest.request_shutdown([message],[reconnect],[delay])`: request for
5439 server shutdown. Will display `message` to clients.
5440 * `reconnect` == true displays a reconnect button
5441 * `delay` adds an optional delay (in seconds) before shutdown.
5442 Negative delay cancels the current active shutdown.
5443 Zero delay triggers an immediate shutdown.
5444 * `minetest.cancel_shutdown_requests()`: cancel current delayed shutdown
5445 * `minetest.get_server_status(name, joined)`
5446 * Returns the server status string when a player joins or when the command
5447 `/status` is called. Returns `nil` or an empty string when the message is
5449 * `joined`: Boolean value, indicates whether the function was called when
5451 * This function may be overwritten by mods to customize the status message.
5452 * `minetest.get_server_uptime()`: returns the server uptime in seconds
5453 * `minetest.remove_player(name)`: remove player from database (if they are not
5455 * As auth data is not removed, minetest.player_exists will continue to
5456 return true. Call the below method as well if you want to remove auth
5458 * Returns a code (0: successful, 1: no such player, 2: player is connected)
5459 * `minetest.remove_player_auth(name)`: remove player authentication data
5460 * Returns boolean indicating success (false if player nonexistant)
5461 * `minetest.dynamic_add_media(filepath, callback)`
5462 * `filepath`: path to a media file on the filesystem
5463 * `callback`: function with arguments `name`, where name is a player name
5464 (previously there was no callback argument; omitting it is deprecated)
5465 * Adds the file to the media sent to clients by the server on startup
5466 and also pushes this file to already connected clients.
5467 The file must be a supported image, sound or model format. It must not be
5468 modified, deleted, moved or renamed after calling this function.
5469 The list of dynamically added media is not persisted.
5470 * Returns false on error, true if the request was accepted
5471 * The given callback will be called for every player as soon as the
5472 media is available on the client.
5473 Old clients that lack support for this feature will not see the media
5474 unless they reconnect to the server. (callback won't be called)
5475 * Since media transferred this way currently does not use client caching
5476 or HTTP transfers, dynamic media should not be used with big files.
5481 * `minetest.get_ban_list()`: returns a list of all bans formatted as string
5482 * `minetest.get_ban_description(ip_or_name)`: returns list of bans matching
5483 IP address or name formatted as string
5484 * `minetest.ban_player(name)`: ban the IP of a currently connected player
5485 * Returns boolean indicating success
5486 * `minetest.unban_player_or_ip(ip_or_name)`: remove ban record matching
5488 * `minetest.kick_player(name, [reason])`: disconnect a player with an optional
5490 * Returns boolean indicating success (false if player nonexistant)
5495 * `minetest.add_particle(particle definition)`
5496 * Deprecated: `minetest.add_particle(pos, velocity, acceleration,
5497 expirationtime, size, collisiondetection, texture, playername)`
5499 * `minetest.add_particlespawner(particlespawner definition)`
5500 * Add a `ParticleSpawner`, an object that spawns an amount of particles
5501 over `time` seconds.
5502 * Returns an `id`, and -1 if adding didn't succeed
5503 * Deprecated: `minetest.add_particlespawner(amount, time,
5507 minexptime, maxexptime,
5509 collisiondetection, texture, playername)`
5511 * `minetest.delete_particlespawner(id, player)`
5512 * Delete `ParticleSpawner` with `id` (return value from
5513 `minetest.add_particlespawner`).
5514 * If playername is specified, only deletes on the player's client,
5515 otherwise on all clients.
5520 * `minetest.create_schematic(p1, p2, probability_list, filename, slice_prob_list)`
5521 * Create a schematic from the volume of map specified by the box formed by
5523 * Apply the specified probability and per-node force-place to the specified
5524 nodes according to the `probability_list`.
5525 * `probability_list` is an array of tables containing two fields, `pos`
5527 * `pos` is the 3D vector specifying the absolute coordinates of the
5528 node being modified,
5529 * `prob` is an integer value from `0` to `255` that encodes
5530 probability and per-node force-place. Probability has levels
5531 0-127, then 128 may be added to encode per-node force-place.
5532 For probability stated as 0-255, divide by 2 and round down to
5533 get values 0-127, then add 128 to apply per-node force-place.
5534 * If there are two or more entries with the same pos value, the
5536 * If `pos` is not inside the box formed by `p1` and `p2`, it is
5538 * If `probability_list` equals `nil`, no probabilities are applied.
5539 * Apply the specified probability to the specified horizontal slices
5540 according to the `slice_prob_list`.
5541 * `slice_prob_list` is an array of tables containing two fields, `ypos`
5543 * `ypos` indicates the y position of the slice with a probability
5544 applied, the lowest slice being `ypos = 0`.
5545 * If slice probability list equals `nil`, no slice probabilities
5547 * Saves schematic in the Minetest Schematic format to filename.
5549 * `minetest.place_schematic(pos, schematic, rotation, replacements, force_placement, flags)`
5550 * Place the schematic specified by schematic (see [Schematic specifier]) at
5552 * `rotation` can equal `"0"`, `"90"`, `"180"`, `"270"`, or `"random"`.
5553 * If the `rotation` parameter is omitted, the schematic is not rotated.
5554 * `replacements` = `{["old_name"] = "convert_to", ...}`
5555 * `force_placement` is a boolean indicating whether nodes other than `air`
5556 and `ignore` are replaced by the schematic.
5557 * Returns nil if the schematic could not be loaded.
5558 * **Warning**: Once you have loaded a schematic from a file, it will be
5559 cached. Future calls will always use the cached version and the
5560 replacement list defined for it, regardless of whether the file or the
5561 replacement list parameter have changed. The only way to load the file
5562 anew is to restart the server.
5563 * `flags` is a flag field with the available flags:
5568 * `minetest.place_schematic_on_vmanip(vmanip, pos, schematic, rotation, replacement, force_placement, flags)`:
5569 * This function is analogous to minetest.place_schematic, but places a
5570 schematic onto the specified VoxelManip object `vmanip` instead of the
5572 * Returns false if any part of the schematic was cut-off due to the
5573 VoxelManip not containing the full area required, and true if the whole
5574 schematic was able to fit.
5575 * Returns nil if the schematic could not be loaded.
5576 * After execution, any external copies of the VoxelManip contents are
5578 * `flags` is a flag field with the available flags:
5583 * `minetest.serialize_schematic(schematic, format, options)`
5584 * Return the serialized schematic specified by schematic
5585 (see [Schematic specifier])
5586 * in the `format` of either "mts" or "lua".
5587 * "mts" - a string containing the binary MTS data used in the MTS file
5589 * "lua" - a string containing Lua code representing the schematic in table
5591 * `options` is a table containing the following optional parameters:
5592 * If `lua_use_comments` is true and `format` is "lua", the Lua code
5593 generated will have (X, Z) position comments for every X row
5594 generated in the schematic data for easier reading.
5595 * If `lua_num_indent_spaces` is a nonzero number and `format` is "lua",
5596 the Lua code generated will use that number of spaces as indentation
5597 instead of a tab character.
5599 * `minetest.read_schematic(schematic, options)`
5600 * Returns a Lua table representing the schematic (see: [Schematic specifier])
5601 * `schematic` is the schematic to read (see: [Schematic specifier])
5602 * `options` is a table containing the following optional parameters:
5603 * `write_yslice_prob`: string value:
5604 * `none`: no `write_yslice_prob` table is inserted,
5605 * `low`: only probabilities that are not 254 or 255 are written in
5606 the `write_ylisce_prob` table,
5607 * `all`: write all probabilities to the `write_yslice_prob` table.
5608 * The default for this option is `all`.
5609 * Any invalid value will be interpreted as `all`.
5614 * `minetest.request_http_api()`:
5615 * returns `HTTPApiTable` containing http functions if the calling mod has
5616 been granted access by being listed in the `secure.http_mods` or
5617 `secure.trusted_mods` setting, otherwise returns `nil`.
5618 * The returned table contains the functions `fetch`, `fetch_async` and
5619 `fetch_async_get` described below.
5620 * Only works at init time and must be called from the mod's main scope
5621 (not from a function).
5622 * Function only exists if minetest server was built with cURL support.
5623 * **DO NOT ALLOW ANY OTHER MODS TO ACCESS THE RETURNED TABLE, STORE IT IN
5625 * `HTTPApiTable.fetch(HTTPRequest req, callback)`
5626 * Performs given request asynchronously and calls callback upon completion
5627 * callback: `function(HTTPRequestResult res)`
5628 * Use this HTTP function if you are unsure, the others are for advanced use
5629 * `HTTPApiTable.fetch_async(HTTPRequest req)`: returns handle
5630 * Performs given request asynchronously and returns handle for
5631 `HTTPApiTable.fetch_async_get`
5632 * `HTTPApiTable.fetch_async_get(handle)`: returns HTTPRequestResult
5633 * Return response data for given asynchronous HTTP request
5638 * `minetest.get_mod_storage()`:
5639 * returns reference to mod private `StorageRef`
5640 * must be called during mod load time
5645 * `minetest.get_connected_players()`: returns list of `ObjectRefs`
5646 * `minetest.is_player(obj)`: boolean, whether `obj` is a player
5647 * `minetest.player_exists(name)`: boolean, whether player exists
5648 (regardless of online status)
5649 * `minetest.hud_replace_builtin(name, hud_definition)`
5650 * Replaces definition of a builtin hud element
5651 * `name`: `"breath"` or `"health"`
5652 * `hud_definition`: definition to replace builtin definition
5653 * `minetest.send_join_message(player_name)`
5654 * This function can be overridden by mods to change the join message.
5655 * `minetest.send_leave_message(player_name, timed_out)`
5656 * This function can be overridden by mods to change the leave message.
5657 * `minetest.hash_node_position(pos)`: returns an 48-bit integer
5658 * `pos`: table {x=number, y=number, z=number},
5659 * Gives a unique hash number for a node position (16+16+16=48bit)
5660 * `minetest.get_position_from_hash(hash)`: returns a position
5661 * Inverse transform of `minetest.hash_node_position`
5662 * `minetest.get_item_group(name, group)`: returns a rating
5663 * Get rating of a group of an item. (`0` means: not in group)
5664 * `minetest.get_node_group(name, group)`: returns a rating
5665 * Deprecated: An alias for the former.
5666 * `minetest.raillike_group(name)`: returns a rating
5667 * Returns rating of the connect_to_raillike group corresponding to name
5668 * If name is not yet the name of a connect_to_raillike group, a new group
5669 id is created, with that name.
5670 * `minetest.get_content_id(name)`: returns an integer
5671 * Gets the internal content ID of `name`
5672 * `minetest.get_name_from_content_id(content_id)`: returns a string
5673 * Gets the name of the content with that content ID
5674 * `minetest.parse_json(string[, nullvalue])`: returns something
5675 * Convert a string containing JSON data into the Lua equivalent
5676 * `nullvalue`: returned in place of the JSON null; defaults to `nil`
5677 * On success returns a table, a string, a number, a boolean or `nullvalue`
5678 * On failure outputs an error message and returns `nil`
5679 * Example: `parse_json("[10, {\"a\":false}]")`, returns `{10, {a = false}}`
5680 * `minetest.write_json(data[, styled])`: returns a string or `nil` and an error
5682 * Convert a Lua table into a JSON string
5683 * styled: Outputs in a human-readable format if this is set, defaults to
5685 * Unserializable things like functions and userdata will cause an error.
5686 * **Warning**: JSON is more strict than the Lua table format.
5687 1. You can only use strings and positive integers of at least one as
5689 2. You can not mix string and integer keys.
5690 This is due to the fact that JSON has two distinct array and object
5692 * Example: `write_json({10, {a = false}})`,
5693 returns `"[10, {\"a\": false}]"`
5694 * `minetest.serialize(table)`: returns a string
5695 * Convert a table containing tables, strings, numbers, booleans and `nil`s
5696 into string form readable by `minetest.deserialize`
5697 * Example: `serialize({foo='bar'})`, returns `'return { ["foo"] = "bar" }'`
5698 * `minetest.deserialize(string[, safe])`: returns a table
5699 * Convert a string returned by `minetest.serialize` into a table
5700 * `string` is loaded in an empty sandbox environment.
5701 * Will load functions if safe is false or omitted. Although these functions
5702 cannot directly access the global environment, they could bypass this
5703 restriction with maliciously crafted Lua bytecode if mod security is
5705 * This function should not be used on untrusted data, regardless of the
5706 value of `safe`. It is fine to serialize then deserialize user-provided
5707 data, but directly providing user input to deserialize is always unsafe.
5708 * Example: `deserialize('return { ["foo"] = "bar" }')`,
5709 returns `{foo='bar'}`
5710 * Example: `deserialize('print("foo")')`, returns `nil`
5711 (function call fails), returns
5712 `error:[string "print("foo")"]:1: attempt to call global 'print' (a nil value)`
5713 * `minetest.compress(data, method, ...)`: returns `compressed_data`
5714 * Compress a string of data.
5715 * `method` is a string identifying the compression method to be used.
5716 * Supported compression methods:
5717 * Deflate (zlib): `"deflate"`
5718 * `...` indicates method-specific arguments. Currently defined arguments
5720 * Deflate: `level` - Compression level, `0`-`9` or `nil`.
5721 * `minetest.decompress(compressed_data, method, ...)`: returns data
5722 * Decompress a string of data (using ZLib).
5723 * See documentation on `minetest.compress()` for supported compression
5725 * `...` indicates method-specific arguments. Currently, no methods use this
5726 * `minetest.rgba(red, green, blue[, alpha])`: returns a string
5727 * Each argument is a 8 Bit unsigned integer
5728 * Returns the ColorString from rgb or rgba values
5729 * Example: `minetest.rgba(10, 20, 30, 40)`, returns `"#0A141E28"`
5730 * `minetest.encode_base64(string)`: returns string encoded in base64
5731 * Encodes a string in base64.
5732 * `minetest.decode_base64(string)`: returns string or nil for invalid base64
5733 * Decodes a string encoded in base64.
5734 * `minetest.is_protected(pos, name)`: returns boolean
5735 * Returning `true` restricts the player `name` from modifying (i.e. digging,
5736 placing) the node at position `pos`.
5737 * `name` will be `""` for non-players or unknown players.
5738 * This function should be overridden by protection mods. It is highly
5739 recommended to grant access to players with the `protection_bypass` privilege.
5740 * Cache and call the old version of this function if the position is
5741 not protected by the mod. This will allow using multiple protection mods.
5744 local old_is_protected = minetest.is_protected
5745 function minetest.is_protected(pos, name)
5746 if mymod:position_protected_from(pos, name) then
5749 return old_is_protected(pos, name)
5751 * `minetest.record_protection_violation(pos, name)`
5752 * This function calls functions registered with
5753 `minetest.register_on_protection_violation`.
5754 * `minetest.is_creative_enabled(name)`: returns boolean
5755 * Returning `true` means that Creative Mode is enabled for player `name`.
5756 * `name` will be `""` for non-players or if the player is unknown.
5757 * This function should be overridden by Creative Mode-related mods to
5758 implement a per-player Creative Mode.
5759 * By default, this function returns `true` if the setting
5760 `creative_mode` is `true` and `false` otherwise.
5761 * `minetest.is_area_protected(pos1, pos2, player_name, interval)`
5762 * Returns the position of the first node that `player_name` may not modify
5763 in the specified cuboid between `pos1` and `pos2`.
5764 * Returns `false` if no protections were found.
5765 * Applies `is_protected()` to a 3D lattice of points in the defined volume.
5766 The points are spaced evenly throughout the volume and have a spacing
5767 similar to, but no larger than, `interval`.
5768 * All corners and edges of the defined volume are checked.
5769 * `interval` defaults to 4.
5770 * `interval` should be carefully chosen and maximised to avoid an excessive
5771 number of points being checked.
5772 * Like `minetest.is_protected`, this function may be extended or
5773 overwritten by mods to provide a faster implementation to check the
5774 cuboid for intersections.
5775 * `minetest.rotate_and_place(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing[, infinitestacks,
5776 orient_flags, prevent_after_place])`
5777 * Attempt to predict the desired orientation of the facedir-capable node
5778 defined by `itemstack`, and place it accordingly (on-wall, on the floor,
5779 or hanging from the ceiling).
5780 * `infinitestacks`: if `true`, the itemstack is not changed. Otherwise the
5781 stacks are handled normally.
5782 * `orient_flags`: Optional table containing extra tweaks to the placement code:
5783 * `invert_wall`: if `true`, place wall-orientation on the ground and
5784 ground-orientation on the wall.
5785 * `force_wall` : if `true`, always place the node in wall orientation.
5786 * `force_ceiling`: if `true`, always place on the ceiling.
5787 * `force_floor`: if `true`, always place the node on the floor.
5788 * `force_facedir`: if `true`, forcefully reset the facedir to north
5789 when placing on the floor or ceiling.
5790 * The first four options are mutually-exclusive; the last in the list
5791 takes precedence over the first.
5792 * `prevent_after_place` is directly passed to `minetest.item_place_node`
5793 * Returns the new itemstack after placement
5794 * `minetest.rotate_node(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing)`
5795 * calls `rotate_and_place()` with `infinitestacks` set according to the state
5796 of the creative mode setting, checks for "sneak" to set the `invert_wall`
5797 parameter and `prevent_after_place` set to `true`.
5799 * `minetest.calculate_knockback(player, hitter, time_from_last_punch,
5800 tool_capabilities, dir, distance, damage)`
5801 * Returns the amount of knockback applied on the punched player.
5802 * Arguments are equivalent to `register_on_punchplayer`, except the following:
5803 * `distance`: distance between puncher and punched player
5804 * This function can be overriden by mods that wish to modify this behaviour.
5805 * You may want to cache and call the old function to allow multiple mods to
5806 change knockback behaviour.
5808 * `minetest.forceload_block(pos[, transient])`
5809 * forceloads the position `pos`.
5810 * returns `true` if area could be forceloaded
5811 * If `transient` is `false` or absent, the forceload will be persistent
5812 (saved between server runs). If `true`, the forceload will be transient
5813 (not saved between server runs).
5815 * `minetest.forceload_free_block(pos[, transient])`
5816 * stops forceloading the position `pos`
5817 * If `transient` is `false` or absent, frees a persistent forceload.
5818 If `true`, frees a transient forceload.
5820 * `minetest.request_insecure_environment()`: returns an environment containing
5821 insecure functions if the calling mod has been listed as trusted in the
5822 `secure.trusted_mods` setting or security is disabled, otherwise returns
5824 * Only works at init time and must be called from the mod's main scope
5825 (ie: the init.lua of the mod, not from another Lua file or within a function).
5826 * **DO NOT ALLOW ANY OTHER MODS TO ACCESS THE RETURNED ENVIRONMENT, STORE
5827 IT IN A LOCAL VARIABLE!**
5829 * `minetest.global_exists(name)`
5830 * Checks if a global variable has been set, without triggering a warning.
5835 * `minetest.env`: `EnvRef` of the server environment and world.
5836 * Any function in the minetest namespace can be called using the syntax
5837 `minetest.env:somefunction(somearguments)`
5838 instead of `minetest.somefunction(somearguments)`
5839 * Deprecated, but support is not to be dropped soon
5844 ### Registered definition tables
5846 * `minetest.registered_items`
5847 * Map of registered items, indexed by name
5848 * `minetest.registered_nodes`
5849 * Map of registered node definitions, indexed by name
5850 * `minetest.registered_craftitems`
5851 * Map of registered craft item definitions, indexed by name
5852 * `minetest.registered_tools`
5853 * Map of registered tool definitions, indexed by name
5854 * `minetest.registered_entities`
5855 * Map of registered entity prototypes, indexed by name
5856 * Values in this table may be modified directly.
5857 Note: changes to initial properties will only affect entities spawned afterwards,
5858 as they are only read when spawning.
5859 * `minetest.object_refs`
5860 * Map of object references, indexed by active object id
5861 * `minetest.luaentities`
5862 * Map of Lua entities, indexed by active object id
5863 * `minetest.registered_abms`
5864 * List of ABM definitions
5865 * `minetest.registered_lbms`
5866 * List of LBM definitions
5867 * `minetest.registered_aliases`
5868 * Map of registered aliases, indexed by name
5869 * `minetest.registered_ores`
5870 * Map of registered ore definitions, indexed by the `name` field.
5871 * If `name` is nil, the key is the object handle returned by
5872 `minetest.register_ore`.
5873 * `minetest.registered_biomes`
5874 * Map of registered biome definitions, indexed by the `name` field.
5875 * If `name` is nil, the key is the object handle returned by
5876 `minetest.register_biome`.
5877 * `minetest.registered_decorations`
5878 * Map of registered decoration definitions, indexed by the `name` field.
5879 * If `name` is nil, the key is the object handle returned by
5880 `minetest.register_decoration`.
5881 * `minetest.registered_schematics`
5882 * Map of registered schematic definitions, indexed by the `name` field.
5883 * If `name` is nil, the key is the object handle returned by
5884 `minetest.register_schematic`.
5885 * `minetest.registered_chatcommands`
5886 * Map of registered chat command definitions, indexed by name
5887 * `minetest.registered_privileges`
5888 * Map of registered privilege definitions, indexed by name
5889 * Registered privileges can be modified directly in this table.
5891 ### Registered callback tables
5893 All callbacks registered with [Global callback registration functions] are added
5894 to corresponding `minetest.registered_*` tables.
5902 Sorted alphabetically.
5907 A fast access data structure to store areas, and find areas near a given
5909 Every area has a `data` string attribute to store additional information.
5910 You can create an empty `AreaStore` by calling `AreaStore()`, or
5911 `AreaStore(type_name)`. The mod decides where to save and load AreaStore.
5912 If you chose the parameter-less constructor, a fast implementation will be
5913 automatically chosen for you.
5917 * `get_area(id, include_borders, include_data)`
5918 * Returns the area information about the specified ID.
5919 * Returned values are either of these:
5921 nil -- Area not found
5922 true -- Without `include_borders` and `include_data`
5924 min = pos, max = pos -- `include_borders == true`
5925 data = string -- `include_data == true`
5928 * `get_areas_for_pos(pos, include_borders, include_data)`
5929 * Returns all areas as table, indexed by the area ID.
5930 * Table values: see `get_area`.
5931 * `get_areas_in_area(edge1, edge2, accept_overlap, include_borders, include_data)`
5932 * Returns all areas that contain all nodes inside the area specified by `edge1`
5933 and `edge2` (inclusive).
5934 * `accept_overlap`: if `true`, areas are returned that have nodes in
5935 common (intersect) with the specified area.
5936 * Returns the same values as `get_areas_for_pos`.
5937 * `insert_area(edge1, edge2, data, [id])`: inserts an area into the store.
5938 * Returns the new area's ID, or nil if the insertion failed.
5939 * The (inclusive) positions `edge1` and `edge2` describe the area.
5940 * `data` is a string stored with the area.
5941 * `id` (optional): will be used as the internal area ID if it is an unique
5942 number between 0 and 2^32-2.
5943 * `reserve(count)`: reserves resources for at most `count` many contained
5945 Only needed for efficiency, and only some implementations profit.
5946 * `remove_area(id)`: removes the area with the given id from the store, returns
5948 * `set_cache_params(params)`: sets params for the included prefiltering cache.
5949 Calling invalidates the cache, so that its elements have to be newly
5951 * `params` is a table with the following fields:
5953 enabled = boolean, -- Whether to enable, default true
5954 block_radius = int, -- The radius (in nodes) of the areas the cache
5955 -- generates prefiltered lists for, minimum 16,
5957 limit = int, -- The cache size, minimum 20, default 1000
5958 * `to_string()`: Experimental. Returns area store serialized as a (binary)
5960 * `to_file(filename)`: Experimental. Like `to_string()`, but writes the data to
5962 * `from_string(str)`: Experimental. Deserializes string and loads it into the
5964 Returns success and, optionally, an error message.
5965 * `from_file(filename)`: Experimental. Like `from_string()`, but reads the data
5971 An `InvRef` is a reference to an inventory.
5975 * `is_empty(listname)`: return `true` if list is empty
5976 * `get_size(listname)`: get size of a list
5977 * `set_size(listname, size)`: set size of a list
5978 * returns `false` on error (e.g. invalid `listname` or `size`)
5979 * `get_width(listname)`: get width of a list
5980 * `set_width(listname, width)`: set width of list; currently used for crafting
5981 * `get_stack(listname, i)`: get a copy of stack index `i` in list
5982 * `set_stack(listname, i, stack)`: copy `stack` to index `i` in list
5983 * `get_list(listname)`: return full list
5984 * `set_list(listname, list)`: set full list (size will not change)
5985 * `get_lists()`: returns list of inventory lists
5986 * `set_lists(lists)`: sets inventory lists (size will not change)
5987 * `add_item(listname, stack)`: add item somewhere in list, returns leftover
5989 * `room_for_item(listname, stack):` returns `true` if the stack of items
5990 can be fully added to the list
5991 * `contains_item(listname, stack, [match_meta])`: returns `true` if
5992 the stack of items can be fully taken from the list.
5993 If `match_meta` is false, only the items' names are compared
5995 * `remove_item(listname, stack)`: take as many items as specified from the
5996 list, returns the items that were actually removed (as an `ItemStack`)
5997 -- note that any item metadata is ignored, so attempting to remove a specific
5998 unique item this way will likely remove the wrong one -- to do that use
5999 `set_stack` with an empty `ItemStack`.
6000 * `get_location()`: returns a location compatible to
6001 `minetest.get_inventory(location)`.
6002 * returns `{type="undefined"}` in case location is not known
6006 Detached & nodemeta inventories provide the following callbacks for move actions:
6010 The `allow_*` callbacks return how many items can be moved.
6012 * `allow_move`/`allow_metadata_inventory_move`: Moving items in the inventory
6013 * `allow_take`/`allow_metadata_inventory_take`: Taking items from the inventory
6014 * `allow_put`/`allow_metadata_inventory_put`: Putting items to the inventory
6018 The `on_*` callbacks are called after the items have been placed in the inventories.
6020 * `on_move`/`on_metadata_inventory_move`: Moving items in the inventory
6021 * `on_take`/`on_metadata_inventory_take`: Taking items from the inventory
6022 * `on_put`/`on_metadata_inventory_put`: Putting items to the inventory
6026 When a player tries to put an item to a place where another item is, the items are *swapped*.
6027 This means that all callbacks will be called twice (once for each action).
6032 An `ItemStack` is a stack of items.
6034 It can be created via `ItemStack(x)`, where x is an `ItemStack`,
6035 an itemstring, a table or `nil`.
6039 * `is_empty()`: returns `true` if stack is empty.
6040 * `get_name()`: returns item name (e.g. `"default:stone"`).
6041 * `set_name(item_name)`: returns a boolean indicating whether the item was
6043 * `get_count()`: Returns number of items on the stack.
6044 * `set_count(count)`: returns a boolean indicating whether the item was cleared
6045 * `count`: number, unsigned 16 bit integer
6046 * `get_wear()`: returns tool wear (`0`-`65535`), `0` for non-tools.
6047 * `set_wear(wear)`: returns boolean indicating whether item was cleared
6048 * `wear`: number, unsigned 16 bit integer
6049 * `get_meta()`: returns ItemStackMetaRef. See section for more details
6050 * `get_metadata()`: (DEPRECATED) Returns metadata (a string attached to an item
6052 * `set_metadata(metadata)`: (DEPRECATED) Returns true.
6053 * `get_description()`: returns the description shown in inventory list tooltips.
6054 * The engine uses this when showing item descriptions in tooltips.
6055 * Fields for finding the description, in order:
6056 * `description` in item metadata (See [Item Metadata].)
6057 * `description` in item definition
6059 * `get_short_description()`: returns the short description or nil.
6060 * Unlike the description, this does not include new lines.
6061 * Fields for finding the short description, in order:
6062 * `short_description` in item metadata (See [Item Metadata].)
6063 * `short_description` in item definition
6064 * first line of the description (From item meta or def, see `get_description()`.)
6065 * Returns nil if none of the above are set
6066 * `clear()`: removes all items from the stack, making it empty.
6067 * `replace(item)`: replace the contents of this stack.
6068 * `item` can also be an itemstring or table.
6069 * `to_string()`: returns the stack in itemstring form.
6070 * `to_table()`: returns the stack in Lua table form.
6071 * `get_stack_max()`: returns the maximum size of the stack (depends on the
6073 * `get_free_space()`: returns `get_stack_max() - get_count()`.
6074 * `is_known()`: returns `true` if the item name refers to a defined item type.
6075 * `get_definition()`: returns the item definition table.
6076 * `get_tool_capabilities()`: returns the digging properties of the item,
6077 or those of the hand if none are defined for this item type
6078 * `add_wear(amount)`
6079 * Increases wear by `amount` if the item is a tool
6080 * `amount`: number, integer
6081 * `add_item(item)`: returns leftover `ItemStack`
6082 * Put some item or stack onto this stack
6083 * `item_fits(item)`: returns `true` if item or stack can be fully added to
6085 * `take_item(n)`: returns taken `ItemStack`
6086 * Take (and remove) up to `n` items from this stack
6087 * `n`: number, default: `1`
6088 * `peek_item(n)`: returns taken `ItemStack`
6089 * Copy (don't remove) up to `n` items from this stack
6090 * `n`: number, default: `1`
6095 ItemStack metadata: reference extra data and functionality stored in a stack.
6096 Can be obtained via `item:get_meta()`.
6100 * All methods in MetaDataRef
6101 * `set_tool_capabilities([tool_capabilities])`
6102 * Overrides the item's tool capabilities
6103 * A nil value will clear the override data and restore the original
6109 Base class used by [`StorageRef`], [`NodeMetaRef`], [`ItemStackMetaRef`],
6110 and [`PlayerMetaRef`].
6114 * `contains(key)`: Returns true if key present, otherwise false.
6115 * Returns `nil` when the MetaData is inexistent.
6116 * `get(key)`: Returns `nil` if key not present, else the stored string.
6117 * `set_string(key, value)`: Value of `""` will delete the key.
6118 * `get_string(key)`: Returns `""` if key not present.
6119 * `set_int(key, value)`
6120 * `get_int(key)`: Returns `0` if key not present.
6121 * `set_float(key, value)`
6122 * `get_float(key)`: Returns `0` if key not present.
6123 * `to_table()`: returns `nil` or a table with keys:
6124 * `fields`: key-value storage
6125 * `inventory`: `{list1 = {}, ...}}` (NodeMetaRef only)
6126 * `from_table(nil or {})`
6127 * Any non-table value will clear the metadata
6128 * See [Node Metadata] for an example
6129 * returns `true` on success
6131 * returns `true` if this metadata has the same key-value pairs as `other`
6136 An interface to use mod channels on client and server
6140 * `leave()`: leave the mod channel.
6141 * Server leaves channel `channel_name`.
6142 * No more incoming or outgoing messages can be sent to this channel from
6144 * This invalidate all future object usage.
6145 * Ensure you set mod_channel to nil after that to free Lua resources.
6146 * `is_writeable()`: returns true if channel is writeable and mod can send over
6148 * `send_all(message)`: Send `message` though the mod channel.
6149 * If mod channel is not writeable or invalid, message will be dropped.
6150 * Message size is limited to 65535 characters by protocol.
6155 Node metadata: reference extra data and functionality stored in a node.
6156 Can be obtained via `minetest.get_meta(pos)`.
6160 * All methods in MetaDataRef
6161 * `get_inventory()`: returns `InvRef`
6162 * `mark_as_private(name or {name1, name2, ...})`: Mark specific vars as private
6163 This will prevent them from being sent to the client. Note that the "private"
6164 status will only be remembered if an associated key-value pair exists,
6165 meaning it's best to call this when initializing all other meta (e.g.
6171 Node Timers: a high resolution persistent per-node timer.
6172 Can be gotten via `minetest.get_node_timer(pos)`.
6176 * `set(timeout,elapsed)`
6177 * set a timer's state
6178 * `timeout` is in seconds, and supports fractional values (0.1 etc)
6179 * `elapsed` is in seconds, and supports fractional values (0.1 etc)
6180 * will trigger the node's `on_timer` function after `(timeout - elapsed)`
6184 * equivalent to `set(timeout,0)`
6187 * `get_timeout()`: returns current timeout in seconds
6188 * if `timeout` equals `0`, timer is inactive
6189 * `get_elapsed()`: returns current elapsed time in seconds
6190 * the node's `on_timer` function will be called after `(timeout - elapsed)`
6192 * `is_started()`: returns boolean state of timer
6193 * returns `true` if timer is started, otherwise `false`
6198 Moving things in the game are generally these.
6199 This is basically a reference to a C++ `ServerActiveObject`.
6201 ### Advice on handling `ObjectRefs`
6203 When you receive an `ObjectRef` as a callback argument or from another API
6204 function, it is possible to store the reference somewhere and keep it around.
6205 It will keep functioning until the object is unloaded or removed.
6207 However, doing this is **NOT** recommended as there is (intentionally) no method
6208 to test if a previously acquired `ObjectRef` is still valid.
6209 Instead, `ObjectRefs` should be "let go" of as soon as control is returned from
6210 Lua back to the engine.
6211 Doing so is much less error-prone and you will never need to wonder if the
6212 object you are working with still exists.
6217 * `get_pos()`: returns `{x=num, y=num, z=num}`
6218 * `set_pos(pos)`: `pos`=`{x=num, y=num, z=num}`
6219 * `get_velocity()`: returns the velocity, a vector.
6220 * `add_velocity(vel)`
6221 * `vel` is a vector, e.g. `{x=0.0, y=2.3, z=1.0}`
6222 * In comparison to using get_velocity, adding the velocity and then using
6223 set_velocity, add_velocity is supposed to avoid synchronization problems.
6224 Additionally, players also do not support set_velocity.
6226 * Does not apply during free_move.
6227 * Note that since the player speed is normalized at each move step,
6228 increasing e.g. Y velocity beyond what would usually be achieved
6229 (see: physics overrides) will cause existing X/Z velocity to be reduced.
6230 * Example: `add_velocity({x=0, y=6.5, z=0})` is equivalent to
6231 pressing the jump key (assuming default settings)
6232 * `move_to(pos, continuous=false)`
6233 * Does an interpolated move for Lua entities for visually smooth transitions.
6234 * If `continuous` is true, the Lua entity will not be moved to the current
6235 position before starting the interpolated move.
6236 * For players this does the same as `set_pos`,`continuous` is ignored.
6237 * `punch(puncher, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, direction)`
6238 * `puncher` = another `ObjectRef`,
6239 * `time_from_last_punch` = time since last punch action of the puncher
6240 * `direction`: can be `nil`
6241 * `right_click(clicker)`; `clicker` is another `ObjectRef`
6242 * `get_hp()`: returns number of health points
6243 * `set_hp(hp, reason)`: set number of health points
6244 * See reason in register_on_player_hpchange
6245 * Is limited to the range of 0 ... 65535 (2^16 - 1)
6246 * For players: HP are also limited by `hp_max` specified in the player's
6248 * `get_inventory()`: returns an `InvRef` for players, otherwise returns `nil`
6249 * `get_wield_list()`: returns the name of the inventory list the wielded item
6251 * `get_wield_index()`: returns the index of the wielded item
6252 * `get_wielded_item()`: returns an `ItemStack`
6253 * `set_wielded_item(item)`: replaces the wielded item, returns `true` if
6255 * `set_armor_groups({group1=rating, group2=rating, ...})`
6256 * `get_armor_groups()`: returns a table with the armor group ratings
6257 * `set_animation(frame_range, frame_speed, frame_blend, frame_loop)`
6258 * `frame_range`: table {x=num, y=num}, default: `{x=1, y=1}`
6259 * `frame_speed`: number, default: `15.0`
6260 * `frame_blend`: number, default: `0.0`
6261 * `frame_loop`: boolean, default: `true`
6262 * `get_animation()`: returns `range`, `frame_speed`, `frame_blend` and
6264 * `set_animation_frame_speed(frame_speed)`
6265 * `frame_speed`: number, default: `15.0`
6266 * `set_attach(parent[, bone, position, rotation, forced_visible])`
6267 * `bone`: string. Default is `""`, the root bone
6268 * `position`: `{x=num, y=num, z=num}`, relative, default `{x=0, y=0, z=0}`
6269 * `rotation`: `{x=num, y=num, z=num}` = Rotation on each axis, in degrees.
6270 Default `{x=0, y=0, z=0}`
6271 * `forced_visible`: Boolean to control whether the attached entity
6272 should appear in first person. Default `false`.
6273 * `get_attach()`: returns parent, bone, position, rotation, forced_visible,
6274 or nil if it isn't attached.
6275 * `get_children()`: returns a list of ObjectRefs that are attached to the
6278 * `set_bone_position([bone, position, rotation])`
6279 * `bone`: string. Default is `""`, the root bone
6280 * `position`: `{x=num, y=num, z=num}`, relative, `default {x=0, y=0, z=0}`
6281 * `rotation`: `{x=num, y=num, z=num}`, default `{x=0, y=0, z=0}`
6282 * `get_bone_position(bone)`: returns position and rotation of the bone
6283 * `set_properties(object property table)`
6284 * `get_properties()`: returns object property table
6285 * `is_player()`: returns true for players, false otherwise
6286 * `get_nametag_attributes()`
6287 * returns a table with the attributes of the nametag of an object
6290 color = {a=0..255, r=0..255, g=0..255, b=0..255},
6291 bgcolor = {a=0..255, r=0..255, g=0..255, b=0..255},
6293 * `set_nametag_attributes(attributes)`
6294 * sets the attributes of the nametag of an object
6297 text = "My Nametag",
6300 bgcolor = ColorSpec or false,
6301 -- ^ Sets background color of nametag
6302 -- `false` will cause the background to be set automatically based on user settings
6306 #### Lua entity only (no-op for other objects)
6308 * `remove()`: remove object
6309 * The object is removed after returning from Lua. However the `ObjectRef`
6310 itself instantly becomes unusable with all further method calls having
6311 no effect and returning `nil`.
6312 * `set_velocity(vel)`
6313 * `vel` is a vector, e.g. `{x=0.0, y=2.3, z=1.0}`
6314 * `set_acceleration(acc)`
6316 * `get_acceleration()`: returns the acceleration, a vector
6317 * `set_rotation(rot)`
6318 * `rot` is a vector (radians). X is pitch (elevation), Y is yaw (heading)
6319 and Z is roll (bank).
6320 * `get_rotation()`: returns the rotation, a vector (radians)
6321 * `set_yaw(yaw)`: sets the yaw in radians (heading).
6322 * `get_yaw()`: returns number in radians
6323 * `set_texture_mod(mod)`
6324 * Set a texture modifier to the base texture, for sprites and meshes.
6325 * When calling `set_texture_mod` again, the previous one is discarded.
6326 * `mod` the texture modifier. See [Texture modifiers].
6327 * `get_texture_mod()` returns current texture modifier
6328 * `set_sprite(start_frame, num_frames, framelength, select_x_by_camera)`
6329 * Specifies and starts a sprite animation
6330 * Animations iterate along the frame `y` position.
6331 * `start_frame`: {x=column number, y=row number}, the coordinate of the
6332 first frame, default: `{x=0, y=0}`
6333 * `num_frames`: Total frames in the texture, default: `1`
6334 * `framelength`: Time per animated frame in seconds, default: `0.2`
6335 * `select_x_by_camera`: Only for visual = `sprite`. Changes the frame `x`
6336 position according to the view direction. default: `false`.
6337 * First column: subject facing the camera
6338 * Second column: subject looking to the left
6339 * Third column: subject backing the camera
6340 * Fourth column: subject looking to the right
6341 * Fifth column: subject viewed from above
6342 * Sixth column: subject viewed from below
6343 * `get_entity_name()` (**Deprecated**: Will be removed in a future version)
6346 #### Player only (no-op for other objects)
6348 * `get_player_name()`: returns `""` if is not a player
6349 * `get_player_velocity()`: **DEPRECATED**, use get_velocity() instead.
6350 table {x, y, z} representing the player's instantaneous velocity in nodes/s
6351 * `add_player_velocity(vel)`: **DEPRECATED**, use add_velocity(vel) instead.
6352 * `get_look_dir()`: get camera direction as a unit vector
6353 * `get_look_vertical()`: pitch in radians
6354 * Angle ranges between -pi/2 and pi/2, which are straight up and down
6356 * `get_look_horizontal()`: yaw in radians
6357 * Angle is counter-clockwise from the +z direction.
6358 * `set_look_vertical(radians)`: sets look pitch
6359 * radians: Angle from looking forward, where positive is downwards.
6360 * `set_look_horizontal(radians)`: sets look yaw
6361 * radians: Angle from the +z direction, where positive is counter-clockwise.
6362 * `get_look_pitch()`: pitch in radians - Deprecated as broken. Use
6363 `get_look_vertical`.
6364 * Angle ranges between -pi/2 and pi/2, which are straight down and up
6366 * `get_look_yaw()`: yaw in radians - Deprecated as broken. Use
6367 `get_look_horizontal`.
6368 * Angle is counter-clockwise from the +x direction.
6369 * `set_look_pitch(radians)`: sets look pitch - Deprecated. Use
6370 `set_look_vertical`.
6371 * `set_look_yaw(radians)`: sets look yaw - Deprecated. Use
6372 `set_look_horizontal`.
6373 * `get_breath()`: returns player's breath
6374 * `set_breath(value)`: sets player's breath
6376 * `0`: player is drowning
6377 * max: bubbles bar is not shown
6378 * See [Object properties] for more information
6379 * Is limited to range 0 ... 65535 (2^16 - 1)
6380 * `set_fov(fov, is_multiplier, transition_time)`: Sets player's FOV
6382 * `is_multiplier`: Set to `true` if the FOV value is a multiplier.
6383 Defaults to `false`.
6384 * `transition_time`: If defined, enables smooth FOV transition.
6385 Interpreted as the time (in seconds) to reach target FOV.
6386 If set to 0, FOV change is instantaneous. Defaults to 0.
6387 * Set `fov` to 0 to clear FOV override.
6388 * `get_fov()`: Returns the following:
6389 * Server-sent FOV value. Returns 0 if an FOV override doesn't exist.
6390 * Boolean indicating whether the FOV value is a multiplier.
6391 * Time (in seconds) taken for the FOV transition. Set by `set_fov`.
6392 * `set_attribute(attribute, value)`: DEPRECATED, use get_meta() instead
6393 * Sets an extra attribute with value on player.
6394 * `value` must be a string, or a number which will be converted to a
6396 * If `value` is `nil`, remove attribute from player.
6397 * `get_attribute(attribute)`: DEPRECATED, use get_meta() instead
6398 * Returns value (a string) for extra attribute.
6399 * Returns `nil` if no attribute found.
6400 * `get_meta()`: Returns a PlayerMetaRef.
6401 * `set_inventory_formspec(formspec)`
6402 * Redefine player's inventory form
6403 * Should usually be called in `on_joinplayer`
6404 * `get_inventory_formspec()`: returns a formspec string
6405 * `set_formspec_prepend(formspec)`:
6406 * the formspec string will be added to every formspec shown to the user,
6407 except for those with a no_prepend[] tag.
6408 * This should be used to set style elements such as background[] and
6409 bgcolor[], any non-style elements (eg: label) may result in weird behaviour.
6410 * Only affects formspecs shown after this is called.
6411 * `get_formspec_prepend(formspec)`: returns a formspec string.
6412 * `get_player_control()`: returns table with player pressed keys
6413 * The table consists of fields with the following boolean values
6414 representing the pressed keys: `up`, `down`, `left`, `right`, `jump`,
6415 `aux1`, `sneak`, `dig`, `place`, `LMB`, `RMB`, and `zoom`.
6416 * The fields `LMB` and `RMB` are equal to `dig` and `place` respectively,
6417 and exist only to preserve backwards compatibility.
6418 * `get_player_control_bits()`: returns integer with bit packed player pressed
6430 * `set_physics_override(override_table)`
6431 * `override_table` is a table with the following fields:
6432 * `speed`: multiplier to default walking speed value (default: `1`)
6433 * `jump`: multiplier to default jump value (default: `1`)
6434 * `gravity`: multiplier to default gravity value (default: `1`)
6435 * `sneak`: whether player can sneak (default: `true`)
6436 * `sneak_glitch`: whether player can use the new move code replications
6437 of the old sneak side-effects: sneak ladders and 2 node sneak jump
6439 * `new_move`: use new move/sneak code. When `false` the exact old code
6440 is used for the specific old sneak behaviour (default: `true`)
6441 * `get_physics_override()`: returns the table given to `set_physics_override`
6442 * `hud_add(hud definition)`: add a HUD element described by HUD def, returns ID
6444 * `hud_remove(id)`: remove the HUD element of the specified id
6445 * `hud_change(id, stat, value)`: change a value of a previously added HUD
6447 * element `stat` values:
6448 `position`, `name`, `scale`, `text`, `number`, `item`, `dir`
6449 * `hud_get(id)`: gets the HUD element definition structure of the specified ID
6450 * `hud_set_flags(flags)`: sets specified HUD flags of player.
6451 * `flags`: A table with the following fields set to boolean values
6459 * If a flag equals `nil`, the flag is not modified
6460 * `minimap`: Modifies the client's permission to view the minimap.
6461 The client may locally elect to not view the minimap.
6462 * `minimap_radar` is only usable when `minimap` is true
6463 * `hud_get_flags()`: returns a table of player HUD flags with boolean values.
6464 * See `hud_set_flags` for a list of flags that can be toggled.
6465 * `hud_set_hotbar_itemcount(count)`: sets number of items in builtin hotbar
6466 * `count`: number of items, must be between `1` and `32`
6467 * `hud_get_hotbar_itemcount`: returns number of visible items
6468 * `hud_set_hotbar_image(texturename)`
6469 * sets background image for hotbar
6470 * `hud_get_hotbar_image`: returns texturename
6471 * `hud_set_hotbar_selected_image(texturename)`
6472 * sets image for selected item of hotbar
6473 * `hud_get_hotbar_selected_image`: returns texturename
6474 * `set_minimap_modes({mode, mode, ...}, selected_mode)`
6475 * Overrides the available minimap modes (and toggle order), and changes the
6477 * `mode` is a table consisting of up to four fields:
6478 * `type`: Available type:
6479 * `off`: Minimap off
6480 * `surface`: Minimap in surface mode
6481 * `radar`: Minimap in radar mode
6482 * `texture`: Texture to be displayed instead of terrain map
6483 (texture is centered around 0,0 and can be scaled).
6484 Texture size is limited to 512 x 512 pixel.
6485 * `label`: Optional label to display on minimap mode toggle
6486 The translation must be handled within the mod.
6487 * `size`: Sidelength or diameter, in number of nodes, of the terrain
6488 displayed in minimap
6489 * `texture`: Only for texture type, name of the texture to display
6490 * `scale`: Only for texture type, scale of the texture map in nodes per
6491 pixel (for example a `scale` of 2 means each pixel represents a 2x2
6493 * `selected_mode` is the mode index to be selected after modes have been changed
6494 (0 is the first mode).
6495 * `set_sky(sky_parameters)`
6496 * The presence of the function `set_sun`, `set_moon` or `set_stars` indicates
6497 whether `set_sky` accepts this format. Check the legacy format otherwise.
6498 * `sky_parameters` is a table with the following optional fields:
6499 * `base_color`: ColorSpec, changes fog in "skybox" and "plain".
6500 * `type`: Available types:
6501 * `"regular"`: Uses 0 textures, `base_color` ignored
6502 * `"skybox"`: Uses 6 textures, `base_color` used as fog.
6503 * `"plain"`: Uses 0 textures, `base_color` used as both fog and sky.
6504 * `textures`: A table containing up to six textures in the following
6505 order: Y+ (top), Y- (bottom), X- (west), X+ (east), Z+ (north), Z- (south).
6506 * `clouds`: Boolean for whether clouds appear. (default: `true`)
6507 * `sky_color`: A table containing the following values, alpha is ignored:
6508 * `day_sky`: ColorSpec, for the top half of the `"regular"`
6509 sky during the day. (default: `#8cbafa`)
6510 * `day_horizon`: ColorSpec, for the bottom half of the
6511 `"regular"` sky during the day. (default: `#9bc1f0`)
6512 * `dawn_sky`: ColorSpec, for the top half of the `"regular"`
6513 sky during dawn/sunset. (default: `#b4bafa`)
6514 The resulting sky color will be a darkened version of the ColorSpec.
6515 Warning: The darkening of the ColorSpec is subject to change.
6516 * `dawn_horizon`: ColorSpec, for the bottom half of the `"regular"`
6517 sky during dawn/sunset. (default: `#bac1f0`)
6518 The resulting sky color will be a darkened version of the ColorSpec.
6519 Warning: The darkening of the ColorSpec is subject to change.
6520 * `night_sky`: ColorSpec, for the top half of the `"regular"`
6521 sky during the night. (default: `#006aff`)
6522 The resulting sky color will be a dark version of the ColorSpec.
6523 Warning: The darkening of the ColorSpec is subject to change.
6524 * `night_horizon`: ColorSpec, for the bottom half of the `"regular"`
6525 sky during the night. (default: `#4090ff`)
6526 The resulting sky color will be a dark version of the ColorSpec.
6527 Warning: The darkening of the ColorSpec is subject to change.
6528 * `indoors`: ColorSpec, for when you're either indoors or
6529 underground. Only applies to the `"regular"` sky.
6530 (default: `#646464`)
6531 * `fog_sun_tint`: ColorSpec, changes the fog tinting for the sun
6532 at sunrise and sunset.
6533 * `fog_moon_tint`: ColorSpec, changes the fog tinting for the moon
6534 at sunrise and sunset.
6535 * `fog_tint_type`: string, changes which mode the directional fog
6536 abides by, `"custom"` uses `sun_tint` and `moon_tint`, while
6537 `"default"` uses the classic Minetest sun and moon tinting.
6538 Will use tonemaps, if set to `"default"`. (default: `"default"`)
6539 * `set_sky(base_color, type, {texture names}, clouds)`
6540 * Deprecated. Use `set_sky(sky_parameters)`
6541 * `base_color`: ColorSpec, defaults to white
6542 * `type`: Available types:
6543 * `"regular"`: Uses 0 textures, `bgcolor` ignored
6544 * `"skybox"`: Uses 6 textures, `bgcolor` used
6545 * `"plain"`: Uses 0 textures, `bgcolor` used
6546 * `clouds`: Boolean for whether clouds appear in front of `"skybox"` or
6547 `"plain"` custom skyboxes (default: `true`)
6548 * `get_sky()`: returns base_color, type, table of textures, clouds.
6549 * `get_sky_color()`: returns a table with the `sky_color` parameters as in
6551 * `set_sun(sun_parameters)`:
6552 * `sun_parameters` is a table with the following optional fields:
6553 * `visible`: Boolean for whether the sun is visible.
6555 * `texture`: A regular texture for the sun. Setting to `""`
6556 will re-enable the mesh sun. (default: `"sun.png"`)
6557 * `tonemap`: A 512x1 texture containing the tonemap for the sun
6558 (default: `"sun_tonemap.png"`)
6559 * `sunrise`: A regular texture for the sunrise texture.
6560 (default: `"sunrisebg.png"`)
6561 * `sunrise_visible`: Boolean for whether the sunrise texture is visible.
6563 * `scale`: Float controlling the overall size of the sun. (default: `1`)
6564 * `get_sun()`: returns a table with the current sun parameters as in
6566 * `set_moon(moon_parameters)`:
6567 * `moon_parameters` is a table with the following optional fields:
6568 * `visible`: Boolean for whether the moon is visible.
6570 * `texture`: A regular texture for the moon. Setting to `""`
6571 will re-enable the mesh moon. (default: `"moon.png"`)
6572 * `tonemap`: A 512x1 texture containing the tonemap for the moon
6573 (default: `"moon_tonemap.png"`)
6574 * `scale`: Float controlling the overall size of the moon (default: `1`)
6575 * `get_moon()`: returns a table with the current moon parameters as in
6577 * `set_stars(star_parameters)`:
6578 * `star_parameters` is a table with the following optional fields:
6579 * `visible`: Boolean for whether the stars are visible.
6581 * `count`: Integer number to set the number of stars in
6582 the skybox. Only applies to `"skybox"` and `"regular"` sky types.
6584 * `star_color`: ColorSpec, sets the colors of the stars,
6585 alpha channel is used to set overall star brightness.
6586 (default: `#ebebff69`)
6587 * `scale`: Float controlling the overall size of the stars (default: `1`)
6588 * `get_stars()`: returns a table with the current stars parameters as in
6590 * `set_clouds(cloud_parameters)`: set cloud parameters
6591 * `cloud_parameters` is a table with the following optional fields:
6592 * `density`: from `0` (no clouds) to `1` (full clouds) (default `0.4`)
6593 * `color`: basic cloud color with alpha channel, ColorSpec
6594 (default `#fff0f0e5`).
6595 * `ambient`: cloud color lower bound, use for a "glow at night" effect.
6596 ColorSpec (alpha ignored, default `#000000`)
6597 * `height`: cloud height, i.e. y of cloud base (default per conf,
6599 * `thickness`: cloud thickness in nodes (default `16`)
6600 * `speed`: 2D cloud speed + direction in nodes per second
6601 (default `{x=0, z=-2}`).
6602 * `get_clouds()`: returns a table with the current cloud parameters as in
6604 * `override_day_night_ratio(ratio or nil)`
6605 * `0`...`1`: Overrides day-night ratio, controlling sunlight to a specific
6607 * `nil`: Disables override, defaulting to sunlight based on day-night cycle
6608 * `get_day_night_ratio()`: returns the ratio or nil if it isn't overridden
6609 * `set_local_animation(idle, walk, dig, walk_while_dig, frame_speed)`:
6610 set animation for player model in third person view.
6611 * Every animation equals to a `{x=starting frame, y=ending frame}` table.
6612 * `frame_speed` sets the animations frame speed. Default is 30.
6613 * `get_local_animation()`: returns idle, walk, dig, walk_while_dig tables and
6615 * `set_eye_offset([firstperson, thirdperson])`: defines offset vectors for
6616 camera per player. An argument defaults to `{x=0, y=0, z=0}` if unspecified.
6617 * in first person view
6618 * in third person view (max. values `{x=-10/10,y=-10,15,z=-5/5}`)
6619 * `get_eye_offset()`: returns first and third person offsets.
6620 * `send_mapblock(blockpos)`:
6621 * Sends a server-side loaded mapblock to the player.
6622 * Returns `false` if failed.
6623 * Resource intensive - use sparsely
6624 * To get blockpos, integer divide pos by 16
6629 A 32-bit pseudorandom number generator.
6630 Uses PCG32, an algorithm of the permuted congruential generator family,
6631 offering very strong randomness.
6633 It can be created via `PcgRandom(seed)` or `PcgRandom(seed, sequence)`.
6637 * `next()`: return next integer random number [`-2147483648`...`2147483647`]
6638 * `next(min, max)`: return next integer random number [`min`...`max`]
6639 * `rand_normal_dist(min, max, num_trials=6)`: return normally distributed
6640 random number [`min`...`max`].
6641 * This is only a rough approximation of a normal distribution with:
6642 * `mean = (max - min) / 2`, and
6643 * `variance = (((max - min + 1) ^ 2) - 1) / (12 * num_trials)`
6644 * Increasing `num_trials` improves accuracy of the approximation
6649 A perlin noise generator.
6650 It can be created via `PerlinNoise()` or `minetest.get_perlin()`.
6651 For `minetest.get_perlin()`, the actual seed used is the noiseparams seed
6652 plus the world seed, to create world-specific noise.
6654 `PerlinNoise(noiseparams)`
6655 `PerlinNoise(seed, octaves, persistence, spread)` (Deprecated).
6657 `minetest.get_perlin(noiseparams)`
6658 `minetest.get_perlin(seeddiff, octaves, persistence, spread)` (Deprecated).
6662 * `get_2d(pos)`: returns 2D noise value at `pos={x=,y=}`
6663 * `get_3d(pos)`: returns 3D noise value at `pos={x=,y=,z=}`
6668 A fast, bulk perlin noise generator.
6670 It can be created via `PerlinNoiseMap(noiseparams, size)` or
6671 `minetest.get_perlin_map(noiseparams, size)`.
6672 For `minetest.get_perlin_map()`, the actual seed used is the noiseparams seed
6673 plus the world seed, to create world-specific noise.
6675 Format of `size` is `{x=dimx, y=dimy, z=dimz}`. The `z` component is omitted
6676 for 2D noise, and it must be must be larger than 1 for 3D noise (otherwise
6679 For each of the functions with an optional `buffer` parameter: If `buffer` is
6680 not nil, this table will be used to store the result instead of creating a new
6685 * `get_2d_map(pos)`: returns a `<size.x>` times `<size.y>` 2D array of 2D noise
6686 with values starting at `pos={x=,y=}`
6687 * `get_3d_map(pos)`: returns a `<size.x>` times `<size.y>` times `<size.z>`
6688 3D array of 3D noise with values starting at `pos={x=,y=,z=}`.
6689 * `get_2d_map_flat(pos, buffer)`: returns a flat `<size.x * size.y>` element
6690 array of 2D noise with values starting at `pos={x=,y=}`
6691 * `get_3d_map_flat(pos, buffer)`: Same as `get2dMap_flat`, but 3D noise
6692 * `calc_2d_map(pos)`: Calculates the 2d noise map starting at `pos`. The result
6693 is stored internally.
6694 * `calc_3d_map(pos)`: Calculates the 3d noise map starting at `pos`. The result
6695 is stored internally.
6696 * `get_map_slice(slice_offset, slice_size, buffer)`: In the form of an array,
6697 returns a slice of the most recently computed noise results. The result slice
6698 begins at coordinates `slice_offset` and takes a chunk of `slice_size`.
6699 E.g. to grab a 2-slice high horizontal 2d plane of noise starting at buffer
6701 `noisevals = noise:get_map_slice({y=20}, {y=2})`
6702 It is important to note that `slice_offset` offset coordinates begin at 1,
6703 and are relative to the starting position of the most recently calculated
6705 To grab a single vertical column of noise starting at map coordinates
6706 x = 1023, y=1000, z = 1000:
6707 `noise:calc_3d_map({x=1000, y=1000, z=1000})`
6708 `noisevals = noise:get_map_slice({x=24, z=1}, {x=1, z=1})`
6714 Uses the same method of storage as the deprecated player attribute API, so
6715 data there will also be in player meta.
6716 Can be obtained using `player:get_meta()`.
6720 * All methods in MetaDataRef
6725 A 16-bit pseudorandom number generator.
6726 Uses a well-known LCG algorithm introduced by K&R.
6728 It can be created via `PseudoRandom(seed)`.
6732 * `next()`: return next integer random number [`0`...`32767`]
6733 * `next(min, max)`: return next integer random number [`min`...`max`]
6734 * `((max - min) == 32767) or ((max-min) <= 6553))` must be true
6735 due to the simple implementation making bad distribution otherwise.
6740 A raycast on the map. It works with selection boxes.
6741 Can be used as an iterator in a for loop as:
6743 local ray = Raycast(...)
6744 for pointed_thing in ray do
6748 The map is loaded as the ray advances. If the map is modified after the
6749 `Raycast` is created, the changes may or may not have an effect on the object.
6751 It can be created via `Raycast(pos1, pos2, objects, liquids)` or
6752 `minetest.raycast(pos1, pos2, objects, liquids)` where:
6754 * `pos1`: start of the ray
6755 * `pos2`: end of the ray
6756 * `objects`: if false, only nodes will be returned. Default is true.
6757 * `liquids`: if false, liquid nodes won't be returned. Default is false.
6761 * `next()`: returns a `pointed_thing` with exact pointing location
6762 * Returns the next thing pointed by the ray or nil.
6767 Interface for the operating system's crypto-secure PRNG.
6769 It can be created via `SecureRandom()`. The constructor returns nil if a
6770 secure random device cannot be found on the system.
6774 * `next_bytes([count])`: return next `count` (default 1, capped at 2048) many
6775 random bytes, as a string.
6780 An interface to read config files in the format of `minetest.conf`.
6782 It can be created via `Settings(filename)`.
6786 * `get(key)`: returns a value
6787 * `get_bool(key, [default])`: returns a boolean
6788 * `default` is the value returned if `key` is not found.
6789 * Returns `nil` if `key` is not found and `default` not specified.
6790 * `get_np_group(key)`: returns a NoiseParams table
6792 * Returns `{flag = true/false, ...}` according to the set flags.
6793 * Is currently limited to mapgen flags `mg_flags` and mapgen-specific
6794 flags like `mgv5_spflags`.
6796 * Setting names can't contain whitespace or any of `="{}#`.
6797 * Setting values can't contain the sequence `\n"""`.
6798 * Setting names starting with "secure." can't be set on the main settings
6799 object (`minetest.settings`).
6800 * `set_bool(key, value)`
6801 * See documentation for set() above.
6802 * `set_np_group(key, value)`
6803 * `value` is a NoiseParams table.
6804 * Also, see documentation for set() above.
6805 * `remove(key)`: returns a boolean (`true` for success)
6806 * `get_names()`: returns `{key1,...}`
6807 * `write()`: returns a boolean (`true` for success)
6808 * Writes changes to file.
6809 * `to_table()`: returns `{[key1]=value1,...}`
6813 The settings have the format `key = value`. Example:
6825 Mod metadata: per mod metadata, saved automatically.
6826 Can be obtained via `minetest.get_mod_storage()` during load time.
6828 WARNING: This storage backend is incaptable to save raw binary data due
6829 to restrictions of JSON.
6833 * All methods in MetaDataRef
6844 Used by `ObjectRef` methods. Part of an Entity definition.
6845 These properties are not persistent, but are applied automatically to the
6846 corresponding Lua entity using the given registration fields.
6847 Player properties need to be saved manually.
6851 -- For players only. Defaults to `minetest.PLAYER_MAX_HP_DEFAULT`.
6854 -- For players only. Defaults to `minetest.PLAYER_MAX_BREATH_DEFAULT`.
6857 -- For players only. Zoom FOV in degrees.
6858 -- Note that zoom loads and/or generates world beyond the server's
6859 -- maximum send and generate distances, so acts like a telescope.
6860 -- Smaller zoom_fov values increase the distance loaded/generated.
6861 -- Defaults to 15 in creative mode, 0 in survival mode.
6862 -- zoom_fov = 0 disables zooming for the player.
6865 -- For players only. Camera height above feet position in nodes.
6866 -- Defaults to 1.625.
6869 -- Collide with `walkable` nodes.
6871 collide_with_objects = true,
6872 -- Collide with other objects if physical = true
6874 collisionbox = {-0.5, 0.0, -0.5, 0.5, 1.0, 0.5}, -- Default
6875 selectionbox = {-0.5, 0.0, -0.5, 0.5, 1.0, 0.5},
6876 -- Selection box uses collision box dimensions when not set.
6877 -- For both boxes: {xmin, ymin, zmin, xmax, ymax, zmax} in nodes from
6881 -- Overrides selection box when false
6883 visual = "cube" / "sprite" / "upright_sprite" / "mesh" / "wielditem" / "item",
6884 -- "cube" is a node-sized cube.
6885 -- "sprite" is a flat texture always facing the player.
6886 -- "upright_sprite" is a vertical flat texture.
6887 -- "mesh" uses the defined mesh model.
6888 -- "wielditem" is used for dropped items.
6889 -- (see builtin/game/item_entity.lua).
6890 -- For this use 'wield_item = itemname' (Deprecated: 'textures = {itemname}').
6891 -- If the item has a 'wield_image' the object will be an extrusion of
6893 -- If 'itemname' is a cubic node or nodebox the object will appear
6894 -- identical to 'itemname'.
6895 -- If 'itemname' is a plantlike node the object will be an extrusion
6897 -- Otherwise for non-node items, the object will be an extrusion of
6898 -- 'inventory_image'.
6899 -- If 'itemname' contains a ColorString or palette index (e.g. from
6900 -- `minetest.itemstring_with_palette()`), the entity will inherit the color.
6901 -- "item" is similar to "wielditem" but ignores the 'wield_image' parameter.
6903 visual_size = {x = 1, y = 1, z = 1},
6904 -- Multipliers for the visual size. If `z` is not specified, `x` will be used
6905 -- to scale the entity along both horizontal axes.
6908 -- File name of mesh when using "mesh" visual
6911 -- Number of required textures depends on visual.
6912 -- "cube" uses 6 textures just like a node, but all 6 must be defined.
6913 -- "sprite" uses 1 texture.
6914 -- "upright_sprite" uses 2 textures: {front, back}.
6915 -- "wielditem" expects 'textures = {itemname}' (see 'visual' above).
6918 -- Number of required colors depends on visual
6920 use_texture_alpha = false,
6921 -- Use texture's alpha channel.
6922 -- Excludes "upright_sprite" and "wielditem".
6923 -- Note: currently causes visual issues when viewed through other
6924 -- semi-transparent materials such as water.
6926 spritediv = {x = 1, y = 1},
6927 -- Used with spritesheet textures for animation and/or frame selection
6928 -- according to position relative to player.
6929 -- Defines the number of columns and rows in the spritesheet:
6932 initial_sprite_basepos = {x = 0, y = 0},
6933 -- Used with spritesheet textures.
6934 -- Defines the {column, row} position of the initially used frame in the
6938 -- If false, object is invisible and can't be pointed.
6940 makes_footstep_sound = false,
6941 -- If true, is able to make footstep sounds of nodes
6942 -- (see node sound definition for details).
6944 automatic_rotate = 0,
6945 -- Set constant rotation in radians per second, positive or negative.
6946 -- Object rotates along the local Y-axis, and works with set_rotation.
6947 -- Set to 0 to disable constant rotation.
6950 -- If positive number, object will climb upwards when it moves
6951 -- horizontally against a `walkable` node, if the height difference
6952 -- is within `stepheight`.
6954 automatic_face_movement_dir = 0.0,
6955 -- Automatically set yaw to movement direction, offset in degrees.
6956 -- 'false' to disable.
6958 automatic_face_movement_max_rotation_per_sec = -1,
6959 -- Limit automatic rotation to this value in degrees per second.
6960 -- No limit if value <= 0.
6962 backface_culling = true,
6963 -- Set to false to disable backface_culling for model
6966 -- Add this much extra lighting when calculating texture color.
6967 -- Value < 0 disables light's effect on texture color.
6968 -- For faking self-lighting, UI style entities, or programmatic coloring
6972 -- The name to display on the head of the object. By default empty.
6973 -- If the object is a player, a nil or empty nametag is replaced by the player's name.
6974 -- For all other objects, a nil or empty string removes the nametag.
6975 -- To hide a nametag, set its color alpha to zero. That will disable it entirely.
6977 nametag_color = <ColorSpec>,
6978 -- Sets text color of nametag
6980 nametag_bgcolor = <ColorSpec>,
6981 -- Sets background color of nametag
6982 -- `false` will cause the background to be set automatically based on user settings.
6986 -- By default empty, text to be shown when pointed at object
6989 -- If false, never save this object statically. It will simply be
6990 -- deleted when the block gets unloaded.
6991 -- The get_staticdata() callback is never called then.
6992 -- Defaults to 'true'.
6994 damage_texture_modifier = "^[brighten",
6995 -- Texture modifier to be applied for a short duration when object is hit
6998 -- Setting this to 'false' disables diffuse lighting of entity
7000 show_on_minimap = false,
7001 -- Defaults to true for players, false for other entities.
7002 -- If set to true the entity will show as a marker on the minimap.
7008 Used by `minetest.register_entity`.
7011 initial_properties = {
7013 mesh = "boats_boat.obj",
7016 -- A table of object properties, see the `Object properties` section.
7017 -- Object properties being read directly from the entity definition
7018 -- table is deprecated. Define object properties in this
7019 -- `initial_properties` table instead.
7021 on_activate = function(self, staticdata, dtime_s),
7023 on_step = function(self, dtime, moveresult),
7024 -- Called every server step
7025 -- dtime: Elapsed time
7026 -- moveresult: Table with collision info (only available if physical=true)
7028 on_punch = function(self, puncher, time_from_last_punch, tool_capabilities, dir),
7030 on_rightclick = function(self, clicker),
7032 get_staticdata = function(self),
7033 -- Called sometimes; the string returned is passed to on_activate when
7034 -- the entity is re-activated from static state
7036 _custom_field = whatever,
7037 -- You can define arbitrary member variables here (see Item definition
7038 -- for more info) by using a '_' prefix
7041 Collision info passed to `on_step`:
7044 touching_ground = boolean,
7046 standing_on_object = boolean,
7049 type = string, -- "node" or "object",
7050 axis = string, -- "x", "y" or "z"
7051 node_pos = vector, -- if type is "node"
7052 object = ObjectRef, -- if type is "object"
7053 old_velocity = vector,
7054 new_velocity = vector,
7060 ABM (ActiveBlockModifier) definition
7061 ------------------------------------
7063 Used by `minetest.register_abm`.
7066 label = "Lava cooling",
7067 -- Descriptive label for profiling purposes (optional).
7068 -- Definitions with identical labels will be listed as one.
7070 nodenames = {"default:lava_source"},
7071 -- Apply `action` function to these nodes.
7072 -- `group:groupname` can also be used here.
7074 neighbors = {"default:water_source", "default:water_flowing"},
7075 -- Only apply `action` to nodes that have one of, or any
7076 -- combination of, these neighbors.
7077 -- If left out or empty, any neighbor will do.
7078 -- `group:groupname` can also be used here.
7081 -- Operation interval in seconds
7084 -- Chance of triggering `action` per-node per-interval is 1.0 / this
7088 -- If true, catch-up behaviour is enabled: The `chance` value is
7089 -- temporarily reduced when returning to an area to simulate time lost
7090 -- by the area being unattended. Note that the `chance` value can often
7093 action = function(pos, node, active_object_count, active_object_count_wider),
7094 -- Function triggered for each qualifying node.
7095 -- `active_object_count` is number of active objects in the node's
7097 -- `active_object_count_wider` is number of active objects in the node's
7098 -- mapblock plus all 26 neighboring mapblocks. If any neighboring
7099 -- mapblocks are unloaded an estmate is calculated for them based on
7100 -- loaded mapblocks.
7103 LBM (LoadingBlockModifier) definition
7104 -------------------------------------
7106 Used by `minetest.register_lbm`.
7108 A loading block modifier (LBM) is used to define a function that is called for
7109 specific nodes (defined by `nodenames`) when a mapblock which contains such nodes
7113 label = "Upgrade legacy doors",
7114 -- Descriptive label for profiling purposes (optional).
7115 -- Definitions with identical labels will be listed as one.
7117 name = "modname:replace_legacy_door",
7119 nodenames = {"default:lava_source"},
7120 -- List of node names to trigger the LBM on.
7121 -- Also non-registered nodes will work.
7122 -- Groups (as of group:groupname) will work as well.
7124 run_at_every_load = false,
7125 -- Whether to run the LBM's action every time a block gets loaded,
7126 -- and not only the first time the block gets loaded after the LBM
7129 action = function(pos, node),
7136 * `{name="image.png", animation={Tile Animation definition}}`
7137 * `{name="image.png", backface_culling=bool, align_style="node"/"world"/"user", scale=int}`
7138 * backface culling enabled by default for most nodes
7139 * align style determines whether the texture will be rotated with the node
7140 or kept aligned with its surroundings. "user" means that client
7141 setting will be used, similar to `glasslike_framed_optional`.
7142 Note: supported by solid nodes and nodeboxes only.
7143 * scale is used to make texture span several (exactly `scale`) nodes,
7144 instead of just one, in each direction. Works for world-aligned
7146 Note that as the effect is applied on per-mapblock basis, `16` should
7147 be equally divisible by `scale` or you may get wrong results.
7148 * `{name="image.png", color=ColorSpec}`
7149 * the texture's color will be multiplied with this color.
7150 * the tile's color overrides the owning node's color in all cases.
7151 * deprecated, yet still supported field names:
7154 Tile animation definition
7155 -------------------------
7158 type = "vertical_frames",
7161 -- Width of a frame in pixels
7164 -- Height of a frame in pixels
7174 -- Width in number of frames
7177 -- Height in number of frames
7180 -- Length of a single frame
7186 Used by `minetest.register_node`, `minetest.register_craftitem`, and
7187 `minetest.register_tool`.
7190 description = "Steel Axe",
7191 -- Can contain new lines. "\n" has to be used as new line character.
7192 -- See also: `get_description` in [`ItemStack`]
7194 short_description = "Steel Axe",
7195 -- Must not contain new lines.
7197 -- Use an [`ItemStack`] to get the short description, eg:
7198 -- ItemStack(itemname):get_short_description()
7201 -- key = name, value = rating; rating = 1..3.
7202 -- If rating not applicable, use 1.
7203 -- e.g. {wool = 1, fluffy = 3}
7204 -- {soil = 2, outerspace = 1, crumbly = 1}
7205 -- {bendy = 2, snappy = 1},
7206 -- {hard = 1, metal = 1, spikes = 1}
7208 inventory_image = "default_tool_steelaxe.png",
7210 inventory_overlay = "overlay.png",
7211 -- An overlay which does not get colorized
7218 -- An image file containing the palette of a node.
7219 -- You can set the currently used color as the "palette_index" field of
7220 -- the item stack metadata.
7221 -- The palette is always stretched to fit indices between 0 and 255, to
7222 -- ensure compatibility with "colorfacedir" and "colorwallmounted" nodes.
7224 color = "0xFFFFFFFF",
7225 -- The color of the item. The palette overrides this.
7227 wield_scale = {x = 1, y = 1, z = 1},
7229 -- The default value of 99 may be configured by
7230 -- users using the setting "default_stack_max"
7235 liquids_pointable = false,
7238 -- When used for nodes: Defines amount of light emitted by node.
7239 -- Otherwise: Defines texture glow when viewed as a dropped item
7240 -- To set the maximum (14), use the value 'minetest.LIGHT_MAX'.
7241 -- A value outside the range 0 to minetest.LIGHT_MAX causes undefined
7244 -- See "Tools" section for an example including explanation
7245 tool_capabilities = {
7246 full_punch_interval = 1.0,
7250 choppy = {times = {[1] = 2.50, [2] = 1.40, [3] = 1.00},
7251 uses = 20, maxlevel = 2},
7253 damage_groups = {groupname = damage},
7254 -- Damage values must be between -32768 and 32767 (2^15)
7256 punch_attack_uses = nil,
7257 -- Amount of uses this tool has for attacking players and entities
7258 -- by punching them (0 = infinite uses).
7259 -- For compatibility, this is automatically set from the first
7260 -- suitable groupcap using the forumla "uses * 3^(maxlevel - 1)".
7261 -- It is recommend to set this explicitly instead of relying on the
7262 -- fallback behavior.
7265 node_placement_prediction = nil,
7266 -- If nil and item is node, prediction is made automatically.
7267 -- If nil and item is not a node, no prediction is made.
7268 -- If "" and item is anything, no prediction is made.
7269 -- Otherwise should be name of node which the client immediately places
7270 -- on ground when the player places the item. Server will always update
7271 -- actual result to client in a short moment.
7273 node_dig_prediction = "air",
7274 -- if "", no prediction is made.
7275 -- if "air", node is removed.
7276 -- Otherwise should be name of node which the client immediately places
7277 -- upon digging. Server will always update actual result shortly.
7280 -- Definition of items sounds to be played at various events.
7281 -- All fields in this table are optional.
7283 breaks = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7284 -- When tool breaks due to wear. Ignored for non-tools
7286 eat = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7287 -- When item is eaten with `minetest.do_item_eat`
7290 on_place = function(itemstack, placer, pointed_thing),
7291 -- Shall place item and return the leftover itemstack.
7292 -- The placer may be any ObjectRef or nil.
7293 -- default: minetest.item_place
7295 on_secondary_use = function(itemstack, user, pointed_thing),
7296 -- Same as on_place but called when not pointing at a node.
7297 -- The user may be any ObjectRef or nil.
7300 on_drop = function(itemstack, dropper, pos),
7301 -- Shall drop item and return the leftover itemstack.
7302 -- The dropper may be any ObjectRef or nil.
7303 -- default: minetest.item_drop
7305 on_use = function(itemstack, user, pointed_thing),
7307 -- Function must return either nil if no item shall be removed from
7308 -- inventory, or an itemstack to replace the original itemstack.
7309 -- e.g. itemstack:take_item(); return itemstack
7310 -- Otherwise, the function is free to do what it wants.
7311 -- The user may be any ObjectRef or nil.
7312 -- The default functions handle regular use cases.
7314 after_use = function(itemstack, user, node, digparams),
7316 -- If defined, should return an itemstack and will be called instead of
7317 -- wearing out the tool. If returns nil, does nothing.
7318 -- If after_use doesn't exist, it is the same as:
7319 -- function(itemstack, user, node, digparams)
7320 -- itemstack:add_wear(digparams.wear)
7323 -- The user may be any ObjectRef or nil.
7325 _custom_field = whatever,
7326 -- Add your own custom fields. By convention, all custom field names
7327 -- should start with `_` to avoid naming collisions with future engine
7334 Used by `minetest.register_node`.
7337 -- <all fields allowed in item definitions>,
7339 drawtype = "normal", -- See "Node drawtypes"
7342 -- Supported for drawtypes "plantlike", "signlike", "torchlike",
7343 -- "firelike", "mesh", "nodebox", "allfaces".
7344 -- For plantlike and firelike, the image will start at the bottom of the
7345 -- node. For torchlike, the image will start at the surface to which the
7346 -- node "attaches". For the other drawtypes the image will be centered
7349 tiles = {tile definition 1, def2, def3, def4, def5, def6},
7350 -- Textures of node; +Y, -Y, +X, -X, +Z, -Z
7351 -- Old field name was 'tile_images'.
7352 -- List can be shortened to needed length.
7354 overlay_tiles = {tile definition 1, def2, def3, def4, def5, def6},
7355 -- Same as `tiles`, but these textures are drawn on top of the base
7356 -- tiles. You can use this to colorize only specific parts of your
7357 -- texture. If the texture name is an empty string, that overlay is not
7358 -- drawn. Since such tiles are drawn twice, it is not recommended to use
7359 -- overlays on very common nodes.
7361 special_tiles = {tile definition 1, Tile definition 2},
7362 -- Special textures of node; used rarely.
7363 -- Old field name was 'special_materials'.
7364 -- List can be shortened to needed length.
7367 -- The node's original color will be multiplied with this color.
7368 -- If the node has a palette, then this setting only has an effect in
7369 -- the inventory and on the wield item.
7371 use_texture_alpha = ...,
7372 -- Specifies how the texture's alpha channel will be used for rendering.
7374 -- * "opaque": Node is rendered opaque regardless of alpha channel
7375 -- * "clip": A given pixel is either fully see-through or opaque
7376 -- depending on the alpha channel being below/above 50% in value
7377 -- * "blend": The alpha channel specifies how transparent a given pixel
7378 -- of the rendered node is
7379 -- The default is "opaque" for drawtypes normal, liquid and flowingliquid;
7380 -- "clip" otherwise.
7381 -- If set to a boolean value (deprecated): true either sets it to blend
7382 -- or clip, false sets it to clip or opaque mode depending on the drawtype.
7384 palette = "palette.png",
7385 -- The node's `param2` is used to select a pixel from the image.
7386 -- Pixels are arranged from left to right and from top to bottom.
7387 -- The node's color will be multiplied with the selected pixel's color.
7388 -- Tiles can override this behavior.
7389 -- Only when `paramtype2` supports palettes.
7391 post_effect_color = "green#0F",
7392 -- Screen tint if player is inside node, see "ColorSpec"
7394 paramtype = "none", -- See "Nodes"
7396 paramtype2 = "none", -- See "Nodes"
7398 place_param2 = nil, -- Force value for param2 when player places node
7400 is_ground_content = true,
7401 -- If false, the cave generator and dungeon generator will not carve
7402 -- through this node.
7403 -- Specifically, this stops mod-added nodes being removed by caves and
7404 -- dungeons when those generate in a neighbor mapchunk and extend out
7405 -- beyond the edge of that mapchunk.
7407 sunlight_propagates = false,
7408 -- If true, sunlight will go infinitely through this node
7410 walkable = true, -- If true, objects collide with node
7412 pointable = true, -- If true, can be pointed at
7414 diggable = true, -- If false, can never be dug
7416 climbable = false, -- If true, can be climbed on (ladder)
7418 buildable_to = false, -- If true, placed nodes can replace this node
7421 -- If true, liquids flow into and replace this node.
7422 -- Warning: making a liquid node 'floodable' will cause problems.
7424 liquidtype = "none", -- "none" / "source" / "flowing"
7426 liquid_alternative_flowing = "", -- Flowing version of source liquid
7428 liquid_alternative_source = "", -- Source version of flowing liquid
7430 liquid_viscosity = 0, -- Higher viscosity = slower flow (max. 7)
7432 liquid_renewable = true,
7433 -- If true, a new liquid source can be created by placing two or more
7437 -- Only valid for "nodebox" drawtype with 'type = "leveled"'.
7438 -- Allows defining the nodebox height without using param2.
7439 -- The nodebox height is 'leveled' / 64 nodes.
7440 -- The maximum value of 'leveled' is `leveled_max`.
7443 -- Maximum value for `leveled` (0-127), enforced in
7444 -- `minetest.set_node_level` and `minetest.add_node_level`.
7445 -- Values above 124 might causes collision detection issues.
7447 liquid_range = 8, -- Number of flowing nodes around source (max. 8)
7450 -- Player will take this amount of damage if no bubbles are left
7452 damage_per_second = 0,
7453 -- If player is inside node, this damage is caused
7455 node_box = {type="regular"}, -- See "Node boxes"
7457 connects_to = nodenames,
7458 -- Used for nodebox nodes with the type == "connected".
7459 -- Specifies to what neighboring nodes connections will be drawn.
7460 -- e.g. `{"group:fence", "default:wood"}` or `"default:stone"`
7462 connect_sides = { "top", "bottom", "front", "left", "back", "right" },
7463 -- Tells connected nodebox nodes to connect only to these sides of this
7467 -- File name of mesh when using "mesh" drawtype
7472 {-2 / 16, -0.5, -2 / 16, 2 / 16, 3 / 16, 2 / 16},
7473 -- Node box format: see [Node boxes]
7476 -- Custom selection box definition. Multiple boxes can be defined.
7477 -- If "nodebox" drawtype is used and selection_box is nil, then node_box
7478 -- definition is used for the selection box.
7483 {-2 / 16, -0.5, -2 / 16, 2 / 16, 3 / 16, 2 / 16},
7484 -- Node box format: see [Node boxes]
7487 -- Custom collision box definition. Multiple boxes can be defined.
7488 -- If "nodebox" drawtype is used and collision_box is nil, then node_box
7489 -- definition is used for the collision box.
7491 -- Support maps made in and before January 2012
7492 legacy_facedir_simple = false,
7493 legacy_wallmounted = false,
7496 -- Valid for drawtypes:
7497 -- mesh, nodebox, plantlike, allfaces_optional, liquid, flowingliquid.
7498 -- 1 - wave node like plants (node top moves side-to-side, bottom is fixed)
7499 -- 2 - wave node like leaves (whole node moves side-to-side)
7500 -- 3 - wave node like liquids (whole node moves up and down)
7501 -- Not all models will properly wave.
7502 -- plantlike drawtype can only wave like plants.
7503 -- allfaces_optional drawtype can only wave like leaves.
7504 -- liquid, flowingliquid drawtypes can only wave like liquids.
7507 -- Definition of node sounds to be played at various events.
7508 -- All fields in this table are optional.
7510 footstep = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7511 -- If walkable, played when object walks on it. If node is
7512 -- climbable or a liquid, played when object moves through it
7514 dig = <SimpleSoundSpec> or "__group",
7515 -- While digging node.
7516 -- If `"__group"`, then the sound will be
7517 -- `default_dig_<groupname>`, where `<groupname>` is the
7518 -- name of the tool's digging group with the fastest digging time.
7519 -- In case of a tie, one of the sounds will be played (but we
7520 -- cannot predict which one)
7521 -- Default value: `"__group"`
7523 dug = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7526 place = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7527 -- Node was placed. Also played after falling
7529 place_failed = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7530 -- When node placement failed.
7531 -- Note: This happens if the _built-in_ node placement failed.
7532 -- This sound will still be played if the node is placed in the
7533 -- `on_place` callback manually.
7535 fall = <SimpleSoundSpec>,
7536 -- When node starts to fall or is detached
7540 -- Name of dropped item when dug.
7541 -- Default dropped item is the node itself.
7542 -- Using a table allows multiple items, drop chances and tool filtering.
7543 -- Tool filtering was undocumented until recently, tool filtering by string
7544 -- matching is deprecated.
7547 -- Maximum number of item lists to drop.
7548 -- The entries in 'items' are processed in order. For each:
7549 -- Tool filtering is applied, chance of drop is applied, if both are
7550 -- successful the entire item list is dropped.
7551 -- Entry processing continues until the number of dropped item lists
7552 -- equals 'max_items'.
7553 -- Therefore, entries should progress from low to high drop chance.
7557 -- 1 in 1000 chance of dropping a diamond.
7558 -- Default rarity is '1'.
7560 items = {"default:diamond"},
7563 -- Only drop if using a tool whose name is identical to one
7565 tools = {"default:shovel_mese", "default:shovel_diamond"},
7567 items = {"default:dirt"},
7568 -- Whether all items in the dropped item list inherit the
7569 -- hardware coloring palette color from the dug node.
7570 -- Default is 'false'.
7571 inherit_color = true,
7574 -- Only drop if using a tool whose name contains
7575 -- "default:shovel_" (this tool filtering by string matching
7577 tools = {"~default:shovel_"},
7579 -- The item list dropped.
7580 items = {"default:sand", "default:desert_sand"},
7585 on_construct = function(pos),
7586 -- Node constructor; called after adding node.
7587 -- Can set up metadata and stuff like that.
7588 -- Not called for bulk node placement (i.e. schematics and VoxelManip).
7591 on_destruct = function(pos),
7592 -- Node destructor; called before removing node.
7593 -- Not called for bulk node placement.
7596 after_destruct = function(pos, oldnode),
7597 -- Node destructor; called after removing node.
7598 -- Not called for bulk node placement.
7601 on_flood = function(pos, oldnode, newnode),
7602 -- Called when a liquid (newnode) is about to flood oldnode, if it has
7603 -- `floodable = true` in the nodedef. Not called for bulk node placement
7604 -- (i.e. schematics and VoxelManip) or air nodes. If return true the
7605 -- node is not flooded, but on_flood callback will most likely be called
7606 -- over and over again every liquid update interval.
7608 -- Warning: making a liquid node 'floodable' will cause problems.
7610 preserve_metadata = function(pos, oldnode, oldmeta, drops),
7611 -- Called when oldnode is about be converted to an item, but before the
7612 -- node is deleted from the world or the drops are added. This is
7613 -- generally the result of either the node being dug or an attached node
7614 -- becoming detached.
7615 -- oldmeta is the NodeMetaRef of the oldnode before deletion.
7616 -- drops is a table of ItemStacks, so any metadata to be preserved can
7617 -- be added directly to one or more of the dropped items. See
7618 -- "ItemStackMetaRef".
7621 after_place_node = function(pos, placer, itemstack, pointed_thing),
7622 -- Called after constructing node when node was placed using
7623 -- minetest.item_place_node / minetest.place_node.
7624 -- If return true no item is taken from itemstack.
7625 -- `placer` may be any valid ObjectRef or nil.
7628 after_dig_node = function(pos, oldnode, oldmetadata, digger),
7629 -- oldmetadata is in table format.
7630 -- Called after destructing node when node was dug using
7631 -- minetest.node_dig / minetest.dig_node.
7634 can_dig = function(pos, [player]),
7635 -- Returns true if node can be dug, or false if not.
7638 on_punch = function(pos, node, puncher, pointed_thing),
7639 -- default: minetest.node_punch
7640 -- Called when puncher (an ObjectRef) punches the node at pos.
7641 -- By default calls minetest.register_on_punchnode callbacks.
7643 on_rightclick = function(pos, node, clicker, itemstack, pointed_thing),
7645 -- Called when clicker (an ObjectRef) "rightclicks"
7646 -- ("rightclick" here stands for the placement key) while pointing at
7647 -- the node at pos with 'node' being the node table.
7648 -- itemstack will hold clicker's wielded item.
7649 -- Shall return the leftover itemstack.
7650 -- Note: pointed_thing can be nil, if a mod calls this function.
7651 -- This function does not get triggered by clients <=0.4.16 if the
7652 -- "formspec" node metadata field is set.
7654 on_dig = function(pos, node, digger),
7655 -- default: minetest.node_dig
7656 -- By default checks privileges, wears out tool and removes node.
7657 -- return true if the node was dug successfully, false otherwise.
7658 -- Deprecated: returning nil is the same as returning true.
7660 on_timer = function(pos, elapsed),
7662 -- called by NodeTimers, see minetest.get_node_timer and NodeTimerRef.
7663 -- elapsed is the total time passed since the timer was started.
7664 -- return true to run the timer for another cycle with the same timeout
7667 on_receive_fields = function(pos, formname, fields, sender),
7668 -- fields = {name1 = value1, name2 = value2, ...}
7669 -- Called when an UI form (e.g. sign text input) returns data.
7670 -- See minetest.register_on_player_receive_fields for more info.
7673 allow_metadata_inventory_move = function(pos, from_list, from_index, to_list, to_index, count, player),
7674 -- Called when a player wants to move items inside the inventory.
7675 -- Return value: number of items allowed to move.
7677 allow_metadata_inventory_put = function(pos, listname, index, stack, player),
7678 -- Called when a player wants to put something into the inventory.
7679 -- Return value: number of items allowed to put.
7680 -- Return value -1: Allow and don't modify item count in inventory.
7682 allow_metadata_inventory_take = function(pos, listname, index, stack, player),
7683 -- Called when a player wants to take something out of the inventory.
7684 -- Return value: number of items allowed to take.
7685 -- Return value -1: Allow and don't modify item count in inventory.
7687 on_metadata_inventory_move = function(pos, from_list, from_index, to_list, to_index, count, player),
7688 on_metadata_inventory_put = function(pos, listname, index, stack, player),
7689 on_metadata_inventory_take = function(pos, listname, index, stack, player),
7690 -- Called after the actual action has happened, according to what was
7694 on_blast = function(pos, intensity),
7695 -- intensity: 1.0 = mid range of regular TNT.
7696 -- If defined, called when an explosion touches the node, instead of
7697 -- removing the node.
7699 mod_origin = "modname",
7700 -- stores which mod actually registered a node
7701 -- if it can not find a source, returns "??"
7702 -- useful for getting what mod truly registered something
7703 -- example: if a node is registered as ":othermodname:nodename",
7704 -- nodename will show "othermodname", but mod_orgin will say "modname"
7710 Used by `minetest.register_craft`.
7715 output = 'default:pick_stone',
7717 {'default:cobble', 'default:cobble', 'default:cobble'},
7718 {'', 'default:stick', ''},
7719 {'', 'default:stick', ''}, -- Also groups; e.g. 'group:crumbly'
7721 replacements = <list of item pairs>,
7722 -- replacements: replace one input item with another item on crafting
7730 output = 'mushrooms:mushroom_stew',
7733 "mushrooms:mushroom_brown",
7734 "mushrooms:mushroom_red",
7736 replacements = <list of item pairs>,
7742 type = "toolrepair",
7743 additional_wear = -0.02,
7746 Note: Tools with group `disable_repair=1` will not repairable by this recipe.
7752 output = "default:glass",
7753 recipe = "default:sand",
7761 recipe = "bucket:bucket_lava",
7763 replacements = {{"bucket:bucket_lava", "bucket:bucket_empty"}},
7769 Used by `minetest.register_ore`.
7771 See [Ores] section above for essential information.
7774 ore_type = "scatter",
7776 ore = "default:stone_with_coal",
7779 -- Facedir rotation. Default is 0 (unchanged rotation)
7781 wherein = "default:stone",
7782 -- A list of nodenames is supported too
7784 clust_scarcity = 8 * 8 * 8,
7785 -- Ore has a 1 out of clust_scarcity chance of spawning in a node.
7786 -- If the desired average distance between ores is 'd', set this to
7790 -- Number of ores in a cluster
7793 -- Size of the bounding box of the cluster.
7794 -- In this example, there is a 3 * 3 * 3 cluster where 8 out of the 27
7795 -- nodes are coal ore.
7799 -- Lower and upper limits for ore
7802 -- Attributes for the ore generation, see 'Ore attributes' section above
7804 noise_threshold = 0.5,
7805 -- If noise is above this threshold, ore is placed. Not needed for a
7806 -- uniform distribution.
7811 spread = {x = 100, y = 100, z = 100},
7816 -- NoiseParams structure describing one of the perlin noises used for
7817 -- ore distribution.
7818 -- Needed by "sheet", "puff", "blob" and "vein" ores.
7819 -- Omit from "scatter" ore for a uniform ore distribution.
7820 -- Omit from "stratum" ore for a simple horizontal strata from y_min to
7823 biomes = {"desert", "rainforest"},
7824 -- List of biomes in which this ore occurs.
7825 -- Occurs in all biomes if this is omitted, and ignored if the Mapgen
7826 -- being used does not support biomes.
7827 -- Can be a list of (or a single) biome names, IDs, or definitions.
7829 -- Type-specific parameters
7832 column_height_min = 1,
7833 column_height_max = 16,
7834 column_midpoint_factor = 0.5,
7840 spread = {x = 100, y = 100, z = 100},
7848 spread = {x = 100, y = 100, z = 100},
7855 random_factor = 1.0,
7858 np_stratum_thickness = {
7861 spread = {x = 100, y = 100, z = 100},
7866 stratum_thickness = 8,
7872 Used by `minetest.register_biome`.
7874 The maximum number of biomes that can be used is 65535. However, using an
7875 excessive number of biomes will slow down map generation. Depending on desired
7876 performance and computing power the practical limit is much lower.
7881 node_dust = "default:snow",
7882 -- Node dropped onto upper surface after all else is generated
7884 node_top = "default:dirt_with_snow",
7886 -- Node forming surface layer of biome and thickness of this layer
7888 node_filler = "default:permafrost",
7890 -- Node forming lower layer of biome and thickness of this layer
7892 node_stone = "default:bluestone",
7893 -- Node that replaces all stone nodes between roughly y_min and y_max.
7895 node_water_top = "default:ice",
7896 depth_water_top = 10,
7897 -- Node forming a surface layer in seawater with the defined thickness
7900 -- Node that replaces all seawater nodes not in the surface layer
7902 node_river_water = "default:ice",
7903 -- Node that replaces river water in mapgens that use
7904 -- default:river_water
7906 node_riverbed = "default:gravel",
7908 -- Node placed under river water and thickness of this layer
7910 node_cave_liquid = "default:lava_source",
7911 node_cave_liquid = {"default:water_source", "default:lava_source"},
7912 -- Nodes placed inside 50% of the medium size caves.
7913 -- Multiple nodes can be specified, each cave will use a randomly
7914 -- chosen node from the list.
7915 -- If this field is left out or 'nil', cave liquids fall back to
7916 -- classic behaviour of lava and water distributed using 3D noise.
7917 -- For no cave liquid, specify "air".
7919 node_dungeon = "default:cobble",
7920 -- Node used for primary dungeon structure.
7921 -- If absent, dungeon nodes fall back to the 'mapgen_cobble' mapgen
7922 -- alias, if that is also absent, dungeon nodes fall back to the biome
7924 -- If present, the following two nodes are also used.
7926 node_dungeon_alt = "default:mossycobble",
7927 -- Node used for randomly-distributed alternative structure nodes.
7928 -- If alternative structure nodes are not wanted leave this absent for
7929 -- performance reasons.
7931 node_dungeon_stair = "stairs:stair_cobble",
7932 -- Node used for dungeon stairs.
7933 -- If absent, stairs fall back to 'node_dungeon'.
7937 -- Upper and lower limits for biome.
7938 -- Alternatively you can use xyz limits as shown below.
7940 max_pos = {x = 31000, y = 128, z = 31000},
7941 min_pos = {x = -31000, y = 9, z = -31000},
7942 -- xyz limits for biome, an alternative to using 'y_min' and 'y_max'.
7943 -- Biome is limited to a cuboid defined by these positions.
7944 -- Any x, y or z field left undefined defaults to -31000 in 'min_pos' or
7945 -- 31000 in 'max_pos'.
7948 -- Vertical distance in nodes above 'y_max' over which the biome will
7949 -- blend with the biome above.
7950 -- Set to 0 for no vertical blend. Defaults to 0.
7953 humidity_point = 50,
7954 -- Characteristic temperature and humidity for the biome.
7955 -- These values create 'biome points' on a voronoi diagram with heat and
7956 -- humidity as axes. The resulting voronoi cells determine the
7957 -- distribution of the biomes.
7958 -- Heat and humidity have average values of 50, vary mostly between
7959 -- 0 and 100 but can exceed these values.
7962 Decoration definition
7963 ---------------------
7965 See [Decoration types]. Used by `minetest.register_decoration`.
7968 deco_type = "simple",
7970 place_on = "default:dirt_with_grass",
7971 -- Node (or list of nodes) that the decoration can be placed on
7974 -- Size of the square divisions of the mapchunk being generated.
7975 -- Determines the resolution of noise variation if used.
7976 -- If the chunk size is not evenly divisible by sidelen, sidelen is made
7977 -- equal to the chunk size.
7980 -- The value determines 'decorations per surface node'.
7981 -- Used only if noise_params is not specified.
7982 -- If >= 10.0 complete coverage is enabled and decoration placement uses
7983 -- a different and much faster method.
7988 spread = {x = 100, y = 100, z = 100},
7995 -- NoiseParams structure describing the perlin noise used for decoration
7997 -- A noise value is calculated for each square division and determines
7998 -- 'decorations per surface node' within each division.
7999 -- If the noise value >= 10.0 complete coverage is enabled and
8000 -- decoration placement uses a different and much faster method.
8002 biomes = {"Oceanside", "Hills", "Plains"},
8003 -- List of biomes in which this decoration occurs. Occurs in all biomes
8004 -- if this is omitted, and ignored if the Mapgen being used does not
8006 -- Can be a list of (or a single) biome names, IDs, or definitions.
8010 -- Lower and upper limits for decoration.
8011 -- These parameters refer to the Y co-ordinate of the 'place_on' node.
8013 spawn_by = "default:water",
8014 -- Node (or list of nodes) that the decoration only spawns next to.
8015 -- Checks two horizontal planes of 8 neighbouring nodes (including
8016 -- diagonal neighbours), one plane level with the 'place_on' node and a
8017 -- plane one node above that.
8020 -- Number of spawn_by nodes that must be surrounding the decoration
8021 -- position to occur.
8022 -- If absent or -1, decorations occur next to any nodes.
8024 flags = "liquid_surface, force_placement, all_floors, all_ceilings",
8025 -- Flags for all decoration types.
8026 -- "liquid_surface": Instead of placement on the highest solid surface
8027 -- in a mapchunk column, placement is on the highest liquid surface.
8028 -- Placement is disabled if solid nodes are found above the liquid
8030 -- "force_placement": Nodes other than "air" and "ignore" are replaced
8031 -- by the decoration.
8032 -- "all_floors", "all_ceilings": Instead of placement on the highest
8033 -- surface in a mapchunk the decoration is placed on all floor and/or
8034 -- ceiling surfaces, for example in caves and dungeons.
8035 -- Ceiling decorations act as an inversion of floor decorations so the
8036 -- effect of 'place_offset_y' is inverted.
8037 -- Y-slice probabilities do not function correctly for ceiling
8038 -- schematic decorations as the behaviour is unchanged.
8039 -- If a single decoration registration has both flags the floor and
8040 -- ceiling decorations will be aligned vertically.
8042 ----- Simple-type parameters
8044 decoration = "default:grass",
8045 -- The node name used as the decoration.
8046 -- If instead a list of strings, a randomly selected node from the list
8047 -- is placed as the decoration.
8050 -- Decoration height in nodes.
8051 -- If height_max is not 0, this is the lower limit of a randomly
8055 -- Upper limit of the randomly selected height.
8056 -- If absent, the parameter 'height' is used as a constant.
8059 -- Param2 value of decoration nodes.
8060 -- If param2_max is not 0, this is the lower limit of a randomly
8064 -- Upper limit of the randomly selected param2.
8065 -- If absent, the parameter 'param2' is used as a constant.
8068 -- Y offset of the decoration base node relative to the standard base
8070 -- Can be positive or negative. Default is 0.
8071 -- Effect is inverted for "all_ceilings" decorations.
8072 -- Ignored by 'y_min', 'y_max' and 'spawn_by' checks, which always refer
8073 -- to the 'place_on' node.
8075 ----- Schematic-type parameters
8077 schematic = "foobar.mts",
8078 -- If schematic is a string, it is the filepath relative to the current
8079 -- working directory of the specified Minetest schematic file.
8080 -- Could also be the ID of a previously registered schematic.
8083 size = {x = 4, y = 6, z = 4},
8085 {name = "default:cobble", param1 = 255, param2 = 0},
8086 {name = "default:dirt_with_grass", param1 = 255, param2 = 0},
8087 {name = "air", param1 = 255, param2 = 0},
8091 {ypos = 2, prob = 128},
8092 {ypos = 5, prob = 64},
8096 -- Alternative schematic specification by supplying a table. The fields
8097 -- size and data are mandatory whereas yslice_prob is optional.
8098 -- See 'Schematic specifier' for details.
8100 replacements = {["oldname"] = "convert_to", ...},
8102 flags = "place_center_x, place_center_y, place_center_z",
8103 -- Flags for schematic decorations. See 'Schematic attributes'.
8106 -- Rotation can be "0", "90", "180", "270", or "random"
8109 -- If the flag 'place_center_y' is set this parameter is ignored.
8110 -- Y offset of the schematic base node layer relative to the 'place_on'
8112 -- Can be positive or negative. Default is 0.
8113 -- Effect is inverted for "all_ceilings" decorations.
8114 -- Ignored by 'y_min', 'y_max' and 'spawn_by' checks, which always refer
8115 -- to the 'place_on' node.
8118 Chat command definition
8119 -----------------------
8121 Used by `minetest.register_chatcommand`.
8124 params = "<name> <privilege>", -- Short parameter description
8126 description = "Remove privilege from player", -- Full description
8128 privs = {privs=true}, -- Require the "privs" privilege to run
8130 func = function(name, param),
8131 -- Called when command is run. Returns boolean success and text output.
8132 -- Special case: The help message is shown to the player if `func`
8133 -- returns false without a text output.
8136 Note that in params, use of symbols is as follows:
8138 * `<>` signifies a placeholder to be replaced when the command is used. For
8139 example, when a player name is needed: `<name>`
8140 * `[]` signifies param is optional and not required when the command is used.
8141 For example, if you require param1 but param2 is optional:
8142 `<param1> [<param2>]`
8143 * `|` signifies exclusive or. The command requires one param from the options
8144 provided. For example: `<param1> | <param2>`
8145 * `()` signifies grouping. For example, when param1 and param2 are both
8146 required, or only param3 is required: `(<param1> <param2>) | <param3>`
8148 Privilege definition
8149 --------------------
8151 Used by `minetest.register_privilege`.
8155 -- Privilege description
8157 give_to_singleplayer = true,
8158 -- Whether to grant the privilege to singleplayer.
8160 give_to_admin = true,
8161 -- Whether to grant the privilege to the server admin.
8162 -- Uses value of 'give_to_singleplayer' by default.
8164 on_grant = function(name, granter_name),
8165 -- Called when given to player 'name' by 'granter_name'.
8166 -- 'granter_name' will be nil if the priv was granted by a mod.
8168 on_revoke = function(name, revoker_name),
8169 -- Called when taken from player 'name' by 'revoker_name'.
8170 -- 'revoker_name' will be nil if the priv was revoked by a mod.
8172 -- Note that the above two callbacks will be called twice if a player is
8173 -- responsible, once with the player name, and then with a nil player
8175 -- Return true in the above callbacks to stop register_on_priv_grant or
8176 -- revoke being called.
8179 Detached inventory callbacks
8180 ----------------------------
8182 Used by `minetest.create_detached_inventory`.
8185 allow_move = function(inv, from_list, from_index, to_list, to_index, count, player),
8186 -- Called when a player wants to move items inside the inventory.
8187 -- Return value: number of items allowed to move.
8189 allow_put = function(inv, listname, index, stack, player),
8190 -- Called when a player wants to put something into the inventory.
8191 -- Return value: number of items allowed to put.
8192 -- Return value -1: Allow and don't modify item count in inventory.
8194 allow_take = function(inv, listname, index, stack, player),
8195 -- Called when a player wants to take something out of the inventory.
8196 -- Return value: number of items allowed to take.
8197 -- Return value -1: Allow and don't modify item count in inventory.
8199 on_move = function(inv, from_list, from_index, to_list, to_index, count, player),
8200 on_put = function(inv, listname, index, stack, player),
8201 on_take = function(inv, listname, index, stack, player),
8202 -- Called after the actual action has happened, according to what was
8212 Used by `Player:hud_add`. Returned by `Player:hud_get`.
8215 hud_elem_type = "image", -- See HUD element types
8216 -- Type of element, can be "image", "text", "statbar", "inventory",
8217 -- "compass" or "minimap"
8219 position = {x=0.5, y=0.5},
8220 -- Left corner position of element
8224 scale = {x = 2, y = 2},
8233 -- Selected item in inventory. 0 for no item selected.
8236 -- Direction: 0: left-right, 1: right-left, 2: top-bottom, 3: bottom-top
8238 alignment = {x=0, y=0},
8240 offset = {x=0, y=0},
8242 size = { x=100, y=100 },
8243 -- Size of element in pixels
8246 -- Z index : lower z-index HUDs are displayed behind higher z-index HUDs
8252 Used by `minetest.add_particle`.
8255 pos = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8256 velocity = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8257 acceleration = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8258 -- Spawn particle at pos with velocity and acceleration
8261 -- Disappears after expirationtime seconds
8264 -- Scales the visual size of the particle texture.
8265 -- If `node` is set, size can be set to 0 to spawn a randomly-sized
8266 -- particle (just like actual node dig particles).
8268 collisiondetection = false,
8269 -- If true collides with `walkable` nodes and, depending on the
8270 -- `object_collision` field, objects too.
8272 collision_removal = false,
8273 -- If true particle is removed when it collides.
8274 -- Requires collisiondetection = true to have any effect.
8276 object_collision = false,
8277 -- If true particle collides with objects that are defined as
8278 -- `physical = true,` and `collide_with_objects = true,`.
8279 -- Requires collisiondetection = true to have any effect.
8282 -- If true faces player using y axis only
8284 texture = "image.png",
8285 -- The texture of the particle
8287 playername = "singleplayer",
8288 -- Optional, if specified spawns particle only on the player's client
8290 animation = {Tile Animation definition},
8291 -- Optional, specifies how to animate the particle texture
8294 -- Optional, specify particle self-luminescence in darkness.
8297 node = {name = "ignore", param2 = 0},
8298 -- Optional, if specified the particle will have the same appearance as
8299 -- node dig particles for the given node.
8300 -- `texture` and `animation` will be ignored if this is set.
8303 -- Optional, only valid in combination with `node`
8304 -- If set to a valid number 1-6, specifies the tile from which the
8305 -- particle texture is picked.
8306 -- Otherwise, the default behavior is used. (currently: any random tile)
8310 `ParticleSpawner` definition
8311 ----------------------------
8313 Used by `minetest.add_particlespawner`.
8317 -- Number of particles spawned over the time period `time`.
8320 -- Lifespan of spawner in seconds.
8321 -- If time is 0 spawner has infinite lifespan and spawns the `amount` on
8322 -- a per-second basis.
8324 minpos = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8325 maxpos = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8326 minvel = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8327 maxvel = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8328 minacc = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8329 maxacc = {x=0, y=0, z=0},
8334 -- The particles' properties are random values between the min and max
8336 -- applies to: pos, velocity, acceleration, expirationtime, size
8337 -- If `node` is set, min and maxsize can be set to 0 to spawn
8338 -- randomly-sized particles (just like actual node dig particles).
8340 collisiondetection = false,
8341 -- If true collide with `walkable` nodes and, depending on the
8342 -- `object_collision` field, objects too.
8344 collision_removal = false,
8345 -- If true particles are removed when they collide.
8346 -- Requires collisiondetection = true to have any effect.
8348 object_collision = false,
8349 -- If true particles collide with objects that are defined as
8350 -- `physical = true,` and `collide_with_objects = true,`.
8351 -- Requires collisiondetection = true to have any effect.
8353 attached = ObjectRef,
8354 -- If defined, particle positions, velocities and accelerations are
8355 -- relative to this object's position and yaw
8358 -- If true face player using y axis only
8360 texture = "image.png",
8361 -- The texture of the particle
8363 playername = "singleplayer",
8364 -- Optional, if specified spawns particles only on the player's client
8366 animation = {Tile Animation definition},
8367 -- Optional, specifies how to animate the particles' texture
8370 -- Optional, specify particle self-luminescence in darkness.
8373 node = {name = "ignore", param2 = 0},
8374 -- Optional, if specified the particles will have the same appearance as
8375 -- node dig particles for the given node.
8376 -- `texture` and `animation` will be ignored if this is set.
8379 -- Optional, only valid in combination with `node`
8380 -- If set to a valid number 1-6, specifies the tile from which the
8381 -- particle texture is picked.
8382 -- Otherwise, the default behavior is used. (currently: any random tile)
8385 `HTTPRequest` definition
8386 ------------------------
8388 Used by `HTTPApiTable.fetch` and `HTTPApiTable.fetch_async`.
8391 url = "http://example.org",
8394 -- Timeout for connection in seconds. Default is 3 seconds.
8396 method = "GET", "POST", "PUT" or "DELETE"
8397 -- The http method to use. Defaults to "GET".
8399 data = "Raw request data string" OR {field1 = "data1", field2 = "data2"},
8400 -- Data for the POST, PUT or DELETE request.
8401 -- Accepts both a string and a table. If a table is specified, encodes
8402 -- table as x-www-form-urlencoded key-value pairs.
8404 user_agent = "ExampleUserAgent",
8405 -- Optional, if specified replaces the default minetest user agent with
8408 extra_headers = { "Accept-Language: en-us", "Accept-Charset: utf-8" },
8409 -- Optional, if specified adds additional headers to the HTTP request.
8410 -- You must make sure that the header strings follow HTTP specification
8414 -- Optional, if true performs a multipart HTTP request.
8415 -- Default is false.
8416 -- Post only, data must be array
8418 post_data = "Raw POST request data string" OR {field1 = "data1", field2 = "data2"},
8419 -- Deprecated, use `data` instead. Forces `method = "POST"`.
8422 `HTTPRequestResult` definition
8423 ------------------------------
8425 Passed to `HTTPApiTable.fetch` callback. Returned by
8426 `HTTPApiTable.fetch_async_get`.
8430 -- If true, the request has finished (either succeeded, failed or timed
8434 -- If true, the request was successful
8437 -- If true, the request timed out
8445 Authentication handler definition
8446 ---------------------------------
8448 Used by `minetest.register_authentication_handler`.
8451 get_auth = function(name),
8452 -- Get authentication data for existing player `name` (`nil` if player
8454 -- Returns following structure:
8455 -- `{password=<string>, privileges=<table>, last_login=<number or nil>}`
8457 create_auth = function(name, password),
8458 -- Create new auth data for player `name`.
8459 -- Note that `password` is not plain-text but an arbitrary
8460 -- representation decided by the engine.
8462 delete_auth = function(name),
8463 -- Delete auth data of player `name`.
8464 -- Returns boolean indicating success (false if player is nonexistent).
8466 set_password = function(name, password),
8467 -- Set password of player `name` to `password`.
8468 -- Auth data should be created if not present.
8470 set_privileges = function(name, privileges),
8471 -- Set privileges of player `name`.
8472 -- `privileges` is in table form, auth data should be created if not
8475 reload = function(),
8476 -- Reload authentication data from the storage location.
8477 -- Returns boolean indicating success.
8479 record_login = function(name),
8480 -- Called when player joins, used for keeping track of last_login
8482 iterate = function(),
8483 -- Returns an iterator (use with `for` loops) for all player names
8484 -- currently in the auth database